| 1 | This is standards.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.3 from | 
|---|
| 2 | ./standards.texi. | 
|---|
| 3 |  | 
|---|
| 4 | START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY | 
|---|
| 5 | * Standards: (standards).        GNU coding standards. | 
|---|
| 6 | END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY | 
|---|
| 7 |  | 
|---|
| 8 | GNU Coding Standards Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, | 
|---|
| 9 | 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | 
|---|
| 10 |  | 
|---|
| 11 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document | 
|---|
| 12 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or | 
|---|
| 13 | any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no | 
|---|
| 14 | Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover | 
|---|
| 15 | Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU | 
|---|
| 16 | Free Documentation License". | 
|---|
| 17 |  | 
|---|
| 18 |  | 
|---|
| 19 | File: standards.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Preface,  Prev: (dir),  Up: (dir) | 
|---|
| 20 |  | 
|---|
| 21 | Version | 
|---|
| 22 | ******* | 
|---|
| 23 |  | 
|---|
| 24 | Last updated February 14, 2002. | 
|---|
| 25 |  | 
|---|
| 26 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 27 |  | 
|---|
| 28 | * Preface::                     About the GNU Coding Standards | 
|---|
| 29 | * Legal Issues::                Keeping Free Software Free | 
|---|
| 30 | * Design Advice::               General Program Design | 
|---|
| 31 | * Program Behavior::            Program Behavior for All Programs | 
|---|
| 32 | * Writing C::                   Making The Best Use of C | 
|---|
| 33 | * Documentation::               Documenting Programs | 
|---|
| 34 | * Managing Releases::           The Release Process | 
|---|
| 35 | * References::                  References to Non-Free Software or Documentation | 
|---|
| 36 | * Copying This Manual::         How to Make Copies of This Manual | 
|---|
| 37 | * Index:: | 
|---|
| 38 |  | 
|---|
| 39 |  | 
|---|
| 40 | File: standards.info,  Node: Preface,  Next: Legal Issues,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top | 
|---|
| 41 |  | 
|---|
| 42 | About the GNU Coding Standards | 
|---|
| 43 | ****************************** | 
|---|
| 44 |  | 
|---|
| 45 | The GNU Coding Standards were written by Richard Stallman and other | 
|---|
| 46 | GNU Project volunteers.  Their purpose is to make the GNU system clean, | 
|---|
| 47 | consistent, and easy to install.  This document can also be read as a | 
|---|
| 48 | guide to writing portable, robust and reliable programs.  It focuses on | 
|---|
| 49 | programs written in C, but many of the rules and principles are useful | 
|---|
| 50 | even if you write in another programming language.  The rules often | 
|---|
| 51 | state reasons for writing in a certain way. | 
|---|
| 52 |  | 
|---|
| 53 | This release of the GNU Coding Standards was last updated February | 
|---|
| 54 | 14, 2002. | 
|---|
| 55 |  | 
|---|
| 56 | If you did not obtain this file directly from the GNU project and | 
|---|
| 57 | recently, please check for a newer version.  You can ftp the GNU Coding | 
|---|
| 58 | Standards from any GNU FTP host in the directory `/pub/gnu/standards/'. | 
|---|
| 59 | The GNU Coding Standards are available there in several different | 
|---|
| 60 | formats: `standards.text', `standards.info', and `standards.dvi', as | 
|---|
| 61 | well as the Texinfo "source" which is divided in two files: | 
|---|
| 62 | `standards.texi' and `make-stds.texi'.  The GNU Coding Standards are | 
|---|
| 63 | also available on the GNU World Wide Web server: | 
|---|
| 64 | `http://www.gnu.org/prep/standards_toc.html'. | 
|---|
| 65 |  | 
|---|
| 66 | Corrections or suggestions for this document should be sent to | 
|---|
| 67 | <bug-standards@gnu.org>.  If you make a suggestion, please include a | 
|---|
| 68 | suggested new wording for it; our time is limited.  We prefer a context | 
|---|
| 69 | diff to the `standards.texi' or `make-stds.texi' files, but if you | 
|---|
| 70 | don't have those files, please mail your suggestion anyway. | 
|---|
| 71 |  | 
|---|
| 72 | These standards cover the minimum of what is important when writing a | 
|---|
| 73 | GNU package.  Likely, the needs for additional standards will come up. | 
|---|
| 74 | Sometimes, you might suggest that such standards be added to this | 
|---|
| 75 | document.  If you think your standards would be generally useful, please | 
|---|
| 76 | do suggest them. | 
|---|
| 77 |  | 
|---|
| 78 | You should also set standards for your package on many questions not | 
|---|
| 79 | addressed or not firmly specified here.  The most important point is to | 
|---|
| 80 | be self-consistent--try to stick to the conventions you pick, and try | 
|---|
| 81 | to document them as much as possible.  That way, your program will be | 
|---|
| 82 | more maintainable by others. | 
|---|
| 83 |  | 
|---|
| 84 |  | 
|---|
| 85 | File: standards.info,  Node: Legal Issues,  Next: Design Advice,  Prev: Preface,  Up: Top | 
|---|
| 86 |  | 
|---|
| 87 | Keeping Free Software Free | 
|---|
| 88 | ************************** | 
|---|
| 89 |  | 
|---|
| 90 | This node discusses how you can make sure that GNU software avoids | 
|---|
| 91 | legal difficulties, and other related issues. | 
|---|
| 92 |  | 
|---|
| 93 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 94 |  | 
|---|
| 95 | * Reading Non-Free Code::       Referring to Proprietary Programs | 
|---|
| 96 | * Contributions::               Accepting Contributions | 
|---|
| 97 | * Trademarks::                  How We Deal with Trademark Issues | 
|---|
| 98 |  | 
|---|
| 99 |  | 
|---|
| 100 | File: standards.info,  Node: Reading Non-Free Code,  Next: Contributions,  Up: Legal Issues | 
|---|
| 101 |  | 
|---|
| 102 | Referring to Proprietary Programs | 
|---|
| 103 | ================================= | 
|---|
| 104 |  | 
|---|
| 105 | Don't in any circumstances refer to Unix source code for or during | 
|---|
| 106 | your work on GNU!  (Or to any other proprietary programs.) | 
|---|
| 107 |  | 
|---|
| 108 | If you have a vague recollection of the internals of a Unix program, | 
|---|
| 109 | this does not absolutely mean you can't write an imitation of it, but | 
|---|
| 110 | do try to organize the imitation internally along different lines, | 
|---|
| 111 | because this is likely to make the details of the Unix version | 
|---|
| 112 | irrelevant and dissimilar to your results. | 
|---|
| 113 |  | 
|---|
| 114 | For example, Unix utilities were generally optimized to minimize | 
|---|
| 115 | memory use; if you go for speed instead, your program will be very | 
|---|
| 116 | different.  You could keep the entire input file in core and scan it | 
|---|
| 117 | there instead of using stdio.  Use a smarter algorithm discovered more | 
|---|
| 118 | recently than the Unix program.  Eliminate use of temporary files.  Do | 
|---|
| 119 | it in one pass instead of two (we did this in the assembler). | 
|---|
| 120 |  | 
|---|
| 121 | Or, on the contrary, emphasize simplicity instead of speed.  For some | 
|---|
| 122 | applications, the speed of today's computers makes simpler algorithms | 
|---|
| 123 | adequate. | 
|---|
| 124 |  | 
|---|
| 125 | Or go for generality.  For example, Unix programs often have static | 
|---|
| 126 | tables or fixed-size strings, which make for arbitrary limits; use | 
|---|
| 127 | dynamic allocation instead.  Make sure your program handles NULs and | 
|---|
| 128 | other funny characters in the input files.  Add a programming language | 
|---|
| 129 | for extensibility and write part of the program in that language. | 
|---|
| 130 |  | 
|---|
| 131 | Or turn some parts of the program into independently usable | 
|---|
| 132 | libraries.  Or use a simple garbage collector instead of tracking | 
|---|
| 133 | precisely when to free memory, or use a new GNU facility such as | 
|---|
| 134 | obstacks. | 
|---|
| 135 |  | 
|---|
| 136 |  | 
|---|
| 137 | File: standards.info,  Node: Contributions,  Next: Trademarks,  Prev: Reading Non-Free Code,  Up: Legal Issues | 
|---|
| 138 |  | 
|---|
| 139 | Accepting Contributions | 
|---|
| 140 | ======================= | 
|---|
| 141 |  | 
|---|
| 142 | If the program you are working on is copyrighted by the Free Software | 
|---|
| 143 | Foundation, then when someone else sends you a piece of code to add to | 
|---|
| 144 | the program, we need legal papers to use it--just as we asked you to | 
|---|
| 145 | sign papers initially.  _Each_ person who makes a nontrivial | 
|---|
| 146 | contribution to a program must sign some sort of legal papers in order | 
|---|
| 147 | for us to have clear title to the program; the main author alone is not | 
|---|
| 148 | enough. | 
|---|
| 149 |  | 
|---|
| 150 | So, before adding in any contributions from other people, please tell | 
|---|
| 151 | us, so we can arrange to get the papers.  Then wait until we tell you | 
|---|
| 152 | that we have received the signed papers, before you actually use the | 
|---|
| 153 | contribution. | 
|---|
| 154 |  | 
|---|
| 155 | This applies both before you release the program and afterward.  If | 
|---|
| 156 | you receive diffs to fix a bug, and they make significant changes, we | 
|---|
| 157 | need legal papers for that change. | 
|---|
| 158 |  | 
|---|
| 159 | This also applies to comments and documentation files.  For copyright | 
|---|
| 160 | law, comments and code are just text.  Copyright applies to all kinds of | 
|---|
| 161 | text, so we need legal papers for all kinds. | 
|---|
| 162 |  | 
|---|
| 163 | We know it is frustrating to ask for legal papers; it's frustrating | 
|---|
| 164 | for us as well.  But if you don't wait, you are going out on a limb--for | 
|---|
| 165 | example, what if the contributor's employer won't sign a disclaimer? | 
|---|
| 166 | You might have to take that code out again! | 
|---|
| 167 |  | 
|---|
| 168 | You don't need papers for changes of a few lines here or there, since | 
|---|
| 169 | they are not significant for copyright purposes.  Also, you don't need | 
|---|
| 170 | papers if all you get from the suggestion is some ideas, not actual code | 
|---|
| 171 | which you use.  For example, if someone send you one implementation, but | 
|---|
| 172 | you write a different implementation of the same idea, you don't need to | 
|---|
| 173 | get papers. | 
|---|
| 174 |  | 
|---|
| 175 | The very worst thing is if you forget to tell us about the other | 
|---|
| 176 | contributor.  We could be very embarrassed in court some day as a | 
|---|
| 177 | result. | 
|---|
| 178 |  | 
|---|
| 179 | We have more detailed advice for maintainers of programs; if you have | 
|---|
| 180 | reached the stage of actually maintaining a program for GNU (whether | 
|---|
| 181 | released or not), please ask us for a copy. | 
|---|
| 182 |  | 
|---|
| 183 |  | 
|---|
| 184 | File: standards.info,  Node: Trademarks,  Prev: Contributions,  Up: Legal Issues | 
|---|
| 185 |  | 
|---|
| 186 | Trademarks | 
|---|
| 187 | ========== | 
|---|
| 188 |  | 
|---|
| 189 | Please do not include any trademark acknowledgements in GNU software | 
|---|
| 190 | packages or documentation. | 
|---|
| 191 |  | 
|---|
| 192 | Trademark acknowledgements are the statements that such-and-such is a | 
|---|
| 193 | trademark of so-and-so.  The GNU Project has no objection to the basic | 
|---|
| 194 | idea of trademarks, but these acknowledgements feel like kowtowing, so | 
|---|
| 195 | we don't use them.  There is no legal requirement for them. | 
|---|
| 196 |  | 
|---|
| 197 | What is legally required, as regards other people's trademarks, is to | 
|---|
| 198 | avoid using them in ways which a reader might read as naming or labeling | 
|---|
| 199 | our own programs or activities.  For example, since "Objective C" is | 
|---|
| 200 | (or at least was) a trademark, we made sure to say that we provide a | 
|---|
| 201 | "compiler for the Objective C language" rather than an "Objective C | 
|---|
| 202 | compiler".  The latter is meant to be short for the former, but it does | 
|---|
| 203 | not explicitly state the relationship, so it could be misinterpreted as | 
|---|
| 204 | using "Objective C" as a label for the compiler rather than for the | 
|---|
| 205 | language. | 
|---|
| 206 |  | 
|---|
| 207 |  | 
|---|
| 208 | File: standards.info,  Node: Design Advice,  Next: Program Behavior,  Prev: Legal Issues,  Up: Top | 
|---|
| 209 |  | 
|---|
| 210 | General Program Design | 
|---|
| 211 | ********************** | 
|---|
| 212 |  | 
|---|
| 213 | This node discusses some of the issues you should take into account | 
|---|
| 214 | when designing your program. | 
|---|
| 215 |  | 
|---|
| 216 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 217 |  | 
|---|
| 218 | * Source Language::             Which languges to use. | 
|---|
| 219 | * Compatibility::               Compatibility with other implementations | 
|---|
| 220 | * Using Extensions::            Using non-standard features | 
|---|
| 221 | * Standard C::                  Using Standard C features | 
|---|
| 222 | * Conditional Compilation::     Compiling Code Only If A Conditional is True | 
|---|
| 223 |  | 
|---|
| 224 |  | 
|---|
| 225 | File: standards.info,  Node: Source Language,  Next: Compatibility,  Up: Design Advice | 
|---|
| 226 |  | 
|---|
| 227 | Which Languages to Use | 
|---|
| 228 | ====================== | 
|---|
| 229 |  | 
|---|
| 230 | When you want to use a language that gets compiled and runs at high | 
|---|
| 231 | speed, the best language to use is C.  Using another language is like | 
|---|
| 232 | using a non-standard feature: it will cause trouble for users.  Even if | 
|---|
| 233 | GCC supports the other language, users may find it inconvenient to have | 
|---|
| 234 | to install the compiler for that other language in order to build your | 
|---|
| 235 | program.  For example, if you write your program in C++, people will | 
|---|
| 236 | have to install the GNU C++ compiler in order to compile your program. | 
|---|
| 237 |  | 
|---|
| 238 | C has one other advantage over C++ and other compiled languages: more | 
|---|
| 239 | people know C, so more people will find it easy to read and modify the | 
|---|
| 240 | program if it is written in C. | 
|---|
| 241 |  | 
|---|
| 242 | So in general it is much better to use C, rather than the comparable | 
|---|
| 243 | alternatives. | 
|---|
| 244 |  | 
|---|
| 245 | But there are two exceptions to that conclusion: | 
|---|
| 246 |  | 
|---|
| 247 | * It is no problem to use another language to write a tool | 
|---|
| 248 | specifically intended for use with that language.  That is because | 
|---|
| 249 | the only people who want to build the tool will be those who have | 
|---|
| 250 | installed the other language anyway. | 
|---|
| 251 |  | 
|---|
| 252 | * If an application is of interest only to a narrow part of the | 
|---|
| 253 | community, then the question of which language it is written in | 
|---|
| 254 | has less effect on other people, so you may as well please | 
|---|
| 255 | yourself. | 
|---|
| 256 |  | 
|---|
| 257 | Many programs are designed to be extensible: they include an | 
|---|
| 258 | interpreter for a language that is higher level than C.  Often much of | 
|---|
| 259 | the program is written in that language, too.  The Emacs editor | 
|---|
| 260 | pioneered this technique. | 
|---|
| 261 |  | 
|---|
| 262 | The standard extensibility interpreter for GNU software is GUILE, | 
|---|
| 263 | which implements the language Scheme (an especially clean and simple | 
|---|
| 264 | dialect of Lisp).  `http://www.gnu.org/software/guile/'.  We don't | 
|---|
| 265 | reject programs written in other "scripting languages" such as Perl and | 
|---|
| 266 | Python, but using GUILE is very important for the overall consistency of | 
|---|
| 267 | the GNU system. | 
|---|
| 268 |  | 
|---|
| 269 |  | 
|---|
| 270 | File: standards.info,  Node: Compatibility,  Next: Using Extensions,  Prev: Source Language,  Up: Design Advice | 
|---|
| 271 |  | 
|---|
| 272 | Compatibility with Other Implementations | 
|---|
| 273 | ======================================== | 
|---|
| 274 |  | 
|---|
| 275 | With occasional exceptions, utility programs and libraries for GNU | 
|---|
| 276 | should be upward compatible with those in Berkeley Unix, and upward | 
|---|
| 277 | compatible with Standard C if Standard C specifies their behavior, and | 
|---|
| 278 | upward compatible with POSIX if POSIX specifies their behavior. | 
|---|
| 279 |  | 
|---|
| 280 | When these standards conflict, it is useful to offer compatibility | 
|---|
| 281 | modes for each of them. | 
|---|
| 282 |  | 
|---|
| 283 | Standard C and POSIX prohibit many kinds of extensions.  Feel free | 
|---|
| 284 | to make the extensions anyway, and include a `--ansi', `--posix', or | 
|---|
| 285 | `--compatible' option to turn them off.  However, if the extension has | 
|---|
| 286 | a significant chance of breaking any real programs or scripts, then it | 
|---|
| 287 | is not really upward compatible.  So you should try to redesign its | 
|---|
| 288 | interface to make it upward compatible. | 
|---|
| 289 |  | 
|---|
| 290 | Many GNU programs suppress extensions that conflict with POSIX if the | 
|---|
| 291 | environment variable `POSIXLY_CORRECT' is defined (even if it is | 
|---|
| 292 | defined with a null value).  Please make your program recognize this | 
|---|
| 293 | variable if appropriate. | 
|---|
| 294 |  | 
|---|
| 295 | When a feature is used only by users (not by programs or command | 
|---|
| 296 | files), and it is done poorly in Unix, feel free to replace it | 
|---|
| 297 | completely with something totally different and better.  (For example, | 
|---|
| 298 | `vi' is replaced with Emacs.)  But it is nice to offer a compatible | 
|---|
| 299 | feature as well.  (There is a free `vi' clone, so we offer it.) | 
|---|
| 300 |  | 
|---|
| 301 | Additional useful features are welcome regardless of whether there | 
|---|
| 302 | is any precedent for them. | 
|---|
| 303 |  | 
|---|
| 304 |  | 
|---|
| 305 | File: standards.info,  Node: Using Extensions,  Next: Standard C,  Prev: Compatibility,  Up: Design Advice | 
|---|
| 306 |  | 
|---|
| 307 | Using Non-standard Features | 
|---|
| 308 | =========================== | 
|---|
| 309 |  | 
|---|
| 310 | Many GNU facilities that already exist support a number of convenient | 
|---|
| 311 | extensions over the comparable Unix facilities.  Whether to use these | 
|---|
| 312 | extensions in implementing your program is a difficult question. | 
|---|
| 313 |  | 
|---|
| 314 | On the one hand, using the extensions can make a cleaner program. | 
|---|
| 315 | On the other hand, people will not be able to build the program unless | 
|---|
| 316 | the other GNU tools are available.  This might cause the program to | 
|---|
| 317 | work on fewer kinds of machines. | 
|---|
| 318 |  | 
|---|
| 319 | With some extensions, it might be easy to provide both alternatives. | 
|---|
| 320 | For example, you can define functions with a "keyword" `INLINE' and | 
|---|
| 321 | define that as a macro to expand into either `inline' or nothing, | 
|---|
| 322 | depending on the compiler. | 
|---|
| 323 |  | 
|---|
| 324 | In general, perhaps it is best not to use the extensions if you can | 
|---|
| 325 | straightforwardly do without them, but to use the extensions if they | 
|---|
| 326 | are a big improvement. | 
|---|
| 327 |  | 
|---|
| 328 | An exception to this rule are the large, established programs (such | 
|---|
| 329 | as Emacs) which run on a great variety of systems.  Using GNU | 
|---|
| 330 | extensions in such programs would make many users unhappy, so we don't | 
|---|
| 331 | do that. | 
|---|
| 332 |  | 
|---|
| 333 | Another exception is for programs that are used as part of | 
|---|
| 334 | compilation: anything that must be compiled with other compilers in | 
|---|
| 335 | order to bootstrap the GNU compilation facilities.  If these require | 
|---|
| 336 | the GNU compiler, then no one can compile them without having them | 
|---|
| 337 | installed already.  That would be extremely troublesome in certain | 
|---|
| 338 | cases. | 
|---|
| 339 |  | 
|---|
| 340 |  | 
|---|
| 341 | File: standards.info,  Node: Standard C,  Next: Conditional Compilation,  Prev: Using Extensions,  Up: Design Advice | 
|---|
| 342 |  | 
|---|
| 343 | Standard C and Pre-Standard C | 
|---|
| 344 | ============================= | 
|---|
| 345 |  | 
|---|
| 346 | 1989 Standard C is widespread enough now that it is ok to use its | 
|---|
| 347 | features in new programs.  There is one exception: do not ever use the | 
|---|
| 348 | "trigraph" feature of Standard C. | 
|---|
| 349 |  | 
|---|
| 350 | 1999 Standard C is not widespread yet, so please do not require its | 
|---|
| 351 | features in programs.  It is ok to use its features if they are present. | 
|---|
| 352 |  | 
|---|
| 353 | However, it is easy to support pre-standard compilers in most | 
|---|
| 354 | programs, so if you know how to do that, feel free.  If a program you | 
|---|
| 355 | are maintaining has such support, you should try to keep it working. | 
|---|
| 356 |  | 
|---|
| 357 | To support pre-standard C, instead of writing function definitions in | 
|---|
| 358 | standard prototype form, | 
|---|
| 359 |  | 
|---|
| 360 | int | 
|---|
| 361 | foo (int x, int y) | 
|---|
| 362 | ... | 
|---|
| 363 |  | 
|---|
| 364 | write the definition in pre-standard style like this, | 
|---|
| 365 |  | 
|---|
| 366 | int | 
|---|
| 367 | foo (x, y) | 
|---|
| 368 | int x, y; | 
|---|
| 369 | ... | 
|---|
| 370 |  | 
|---|
| 371 | and use a separate declaration to specify the argument prototype: | 
|---|
| 372 |  | 
|---|
| 373 | int foo (int, int); | 
|---|
| 374 |  | 
|---|
| 375 | You need such a declaration anyway, in a header file, to get the | 
|---|
| 376 | benefit of prototypes in all the files where the function is called. | 
|---|
| 377 | And once you have the declaration, you normally lose nothing by writing | 
|---|
| 378 | the function definition in the pre-standard style. | 
|---|
| 379 |  | 
|---|
| 380 | This technique does not work for integer types narrower than `int'. | 
|---|
| 381 | If you think of an argument as being of a type narrower than `int', | 
|---|
| 382 | declare it as `int' instead. | 
|---|
| 383 |  | 
|---|
| 384 | There are a few special cases where this technique is hard to use. | 
|---|
| 385 | For example, if a function argument needs to hold the system type | 
|---|
| 386 | `dev_t', you run into trouble, because `dev_t' is shorter than `int' on | 
|---|
| 387 | some machines; but you cannot use `int' instead, because `dev_t' is | 
|---|
| 388 | wider than `int' on some machines.  There is no type you can safely use | 
|---|
| 389 | on all machines in a non-standard definition.  The only way to support | 
|---|
| 390 | non-standard C and pass such an argument is to check the width of | 
|---|
| 391 | `dev_t' using Autoconf and choose the argument type accordingly.  This | 
|---|
| 392 | may not be worth the trouble. | 
|---|
| 393 |  | 
|---|
| 394 | In order to support pre-standard compilers that do not recognize | 
|---|
| 395 | prototypes, you may want to use a preprocessor macro like this: | 
|---|
| 396 |  | 
|---|
| 397 | /* Declare the prototype for a general external function.  */ | 
|---|
| 398 | #if defined (__STDC__) || defined (WINDOWSNT) | 
|---|
| 399 | #define P_(proto) proto | 
|---|
| 400 | #else | 
|---|
| 401 | #define P_(proto) () | 
|---|
| 402 | #endif | 
|---|
| 403 |  | 
|---|
| 404 |  | 
|---|
| 405 | File: standards.info,  Node: Conditional Compilation,  Prev: Standard C,  Up: Design Advice | 
|---|
| 406 |  | 
|---|
| 407 | Conditional Compilation | 
|---|
| 408 | ======================= | 
|---|
| 409 |  | 
|---|
| 410 | When supporting configuration options already known when building | 
|---|
| 411 | your program we prefer using `if (... )' over conditional compilation, | 
|---|
| 412 | as in the former case the compiler is able to perform more extensive | 
|---|
| 413 | checking of all possible code paths. | 
|---|
| 414 |  | 
|---|
| 415 | For example, please write | 
|---|
| 416 |  | 
|---|
| 417 | if (HAS_FOO) | 
|---|
| 418 | ... | 
|---|
| 419 | else | 
|---|
| 420 | ... | 
|---|
| 421 |  | 
|---|
| 422 | instead of: | 
|---|
| 423 |  | 
|---|
| 424 | #ifdef HAS_FOO | 
|---|
| 425 | ... | 
|---|
| 426 | #else | 
|---|
| 427 | ... | 
|---|
| 428 | #endif | 
|---|
| 429 |  | 
|---|
| 430 | A modern compiler such as GCC will generate exactly the same code in | 
|---|
| 431 | both cases, and we have been using similar techniques with good success | 
|---|
| 432 | in several projects. | 
|---|
| 433 |  | 
|---|
| 434 | While this is not a silver bullet solving all portability problems, | 
|---|
| 435 | following this policy would have saved the GCC project alone many person | 
|---|
| 436 | hours if not days per year. | 
|---|
| 437 |  | 
|---|
| 438 | In the case of function-like macros like `REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE' in GCC | 
|---|
| 439 | which cannot be simply used in `if( ...)' statements, there is an easy | 
|---|
| 440 | workaround.  Simply introduce another macro `HAS_REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE' as | 
|---|
| 441 | in the following example: | 
|---|
| 442 |  | 
|---|
| 443 | #ifdef REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE | 
|---|
| 444 | #define HAS_REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE 1 | 
|---|
| 445 | #else | 
|---|
| 446 | #define HAS_REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE 0 | 
|---|
| 447 | #endif | 
|---|
| 448 |  | 
|---|
| 449 |  | 
|---|
| 450 | File: standards.info,  Node: Program Behavior,  Next: Writing C,  Prev: Design Advice,  Up: Top | 
|---|
| 451 |  | 
|---|
| 452 | Program Behavior for All Programs | 
|---|
| 453 | ********************************* | 
|---|
| 454 |  | 
|---|
| 455 | This node describes conventions for writing robust software.  It | 
|---|
| 456 | also describes general standards for error messages, the command line | 
|---|
| 457 | interface, and how libraries should behave. | 
|---|
| 458 |  | 
|---|
| 459 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 460 |  | 
|---|
| 461 | * Semantics::                   Writing robust programs | 
|---|
| 462 | * Libraries::                   Library behavior | 
|---|
| 463 | * Errors::                      Formatting error messages | 
|---|
| 464 | * User Interfaces::             Standards about interfaces generally | 
|---|
| 465 | * Graphical Interfaces::        Standards for graphical interfaces | 
|---|
| 466 | * Command-Line Interfaces::     Standards for command line interfaces | 
|---|
| 467 | * Option Table::                Table of long options | 
|---|
| 468 | * Memory Usage::                When and how to care about memory needs | 
|---|
| 469 | * File Usage::                  Which files to use, and where | 
|---|
| 470 |  | 
|---|
| 471 |  | 
|---|
| 472 | File: standards.info,  Node: Semantics,  Next: Libraries,  Up: Program Behavior | 
|---|
| 473 |  | 
|---|
| 474 | Writing Robust Programs | 
|---|
| 475 | ======================= | 
|---|
| 476 |  | 
|---|
| 477 | Avoid arbitrary limits on the length or number of _any_ data | 
|---|
| 478 | structure, including file names, lines, files, and symbols, by | 
|---|
| 479 | allocating all data structures dynamically.  In most Unix utilities, | 
|---|
| 480 | "long lines are silently truncated".  This is not acceptable in a GNU | 
|---|
| 481 | utility. | 
|---|
| 482 |  | 
|---|
| 483 | Utilities reading files should not drop NUL characters, or any other | 
|---|
| 484 | nonprinting characters _including those with codes above 0177_.  The | 
|---|
| 485 | only sensible exceptions would be utilities specifically intended for | 
|---|
| 486 | interface to certain types of terminals or printers that can't handle | 
|---|
| 487 | those characters.  Whenever possible, try to make programs work | 
|---|
| 488 | properly with sequences of bytes that represent multibyte characters, | 
|---|
| 489 | using encodings such as UTF-8 and others. | 
|---|
| 490 |  | 
|---|
| 491 | Check every system call for an error return, unless you know you | 
|---|
| 492 | wish to ignore errors.  Include the system error text (from `perror' or | 
|---|
| 493 | equivalent) in _every_ error message resulting from a failing system | 
|---|
| 494 | call, as well as the name of the file if any and the name of the | 
|---|
| 495 | utility.  Just "cannot open foo.c" or "stat failed" is not sufficient. | 
|---|
| 496 |  | 
|---|
| 497 | Check every call to `malloc' or `realloc' to see if it returned | 
|---|
| 498 | zero.  Check `realloc' even if you are making the block smaller; in a | 
|---|
| 499 | system that rounds block sizes to a power of 2, `realloc' may get a | 
|---|
| 500 | different block if you ask for less space. | 
|---|
| 501 |  | 
|---|
| 502 | In Unix, `realloc' can destroy the storage block if it returns zero. | 
|---|
| 503 | GNU `realloc' does not have this bug: if it fails, the original block | 
|---|
| 504 | is unchanged.  Feel free to assume the bug is fixed.  If you wish to | 
|---|
| 505 | run your program on Unix, and wish to avoid lossage in this case, you | 
|---|
| 506 | can use the GNU `malloc'. | 
|---|
| 507 |  | 
|---|
| 508 | You must expect `free' to alter the contents of the block that was | 
|---|
| 509 | freed.  Anything you want to fetch from the block, you must fetch before | 
|---|
| 510 | calling `free'. | 
|---|
| 511 |  | 
|---|
| 512 | If `malloc' fails in a noninteractive program, make that a fatal | 
|---|
| 513 | error.  In an interactive program (one that reads commands from the | 
|---|
| 514 | user), it is better to abort the command and return to the command | 
|---|
| 515 | reader loop.  This allows the user to kill other processes to free up | 
|---|
| 516 | virtual memory, and then try the command again. | 
|---|
| 517 |  | 
|---|
| 518 | Use `getopt_long' to decode arguments, unless the argument syntax | 
|---|
| 519 | makes this unreasonable. | 
|---|
| 520 |  | 
|---|
| 521 | When static storage is to be written in during program execution, use | 
|---|
| 522 | explicit C code to initialize it.  Reserve C initialized declarations | 
|---|
| 523 | for data that will not be changed. | 
|---|
| 524 |  | 
|---|
| 525 | Try to avoid low-level interfaces to obscure Unix data structures | 
|---|
| 526 | (such as file directories, utmp, or the layout of kernel memory), since | 
|---|
| 527 | these are less likely to work compatibly.  If you need to find all the | 
|---|
| 528 | files in a directory, use `readdir' or some other high-level interface. | 
|---|
| 529 | These are supported compatibly by GNU. | 
|---|
| 530 |  | 
|---|
| 531 | The preferred signal handling facilities are the BSD variant of | 
|---|
| 532 | `signal', and the POSIX `sigaction' function; the alternative USG | 
|---|
| 533 | `signal' interface is an inferior design. | 
|---|
| 534 |  | 
|---|
| 535 | Nowadays, using the POSIX signal functions may be the easiest way to | 
|---|
| 536 | make a program portable.  If you use `signal', then on GNU/Linux | 
|---|
| 537 | systems running GNU libc version 1, you should include `bsd/signal.h' | 
|---|
| 538 | instead of `signal.h', so as to get BSD behavior.  It is up to you | 
|---|
| 539 | whether to support systems where `signal' has only the USG behavior, or | 
|---|
| 540 | give up on them. | 
|---|
| 541 |  | 
|---|
| 542 | In error checks that detect "impossible" conditions, just abort. | 
|---|
| 543 | There is usually no point in printing any message.  These checks | 
|---|
| 544 | indicate the existence of bugs.  Whoever wants to fix the bugs will have | 
|---|
| 545 | to read the source code and run a debugger.  So explain the problem with | 
|---|
| 546 | comments in the source.  The relevant data will be in variables, which | 
|---|
| 547 | are easy to examine with the debugger, so there is no point moving them | 
|---|
| 548 | elsewhere. | 
|---|
| 549 |  | 
|---|
| 550 | Do not use a count of errors as the exit status for a program. | 
|---|
| 551 | _That does not work_, because exit status values are limited to 8 bits | 
|---|
| 552 | (0 through 255).  A single run of the program might have 256 errors; if | 
|---|
| 553 | you try to return 256 as the exit status, the parent process will see 0 | 
|---|
| 554 | as the status, and it will appear that the program succeeded. | 
|---|
| 555 |  | 
|---|
| 556 | If you make temporary files, check the `TMPDIR' environment | 
|---|
| 557 | variable; if that variable is defined, use the specified directory | 
|---|
| 558 | instead of `/tmp'. | 
|---|
| 559 |  | 
|---|
| 560 | In addition, be aware that there is a possible security problem when | 
|---|
| 561 | creating temporary files in world-writable directories.  In C, you can | 
|---|
| 562 | avoid this problem by creating temporary files in this manner: | 
|---|
| 563 |  | 
|---|
| 564 | fd = open(filename, O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_EXCL, 0600); | 
|---|
| 565 |  | 
|---|
| 566 | or by using the `mkstemps' function from libiberty. | 
|---|
| 567 |  | 
|---|
| 568 | In bash, use `set -C' to avoid this problem. | 
|---|
| 569 |  | 
|---|
| 570 |  | 
|---|
| 571 | File: standards.info,  Node: Libraries,  Next: Errors,  Prev: Semantics,  Up: Program Behavior | 
|---|
| 572 |  | 
|---|
| 573 | Library Behavior | 
|---|
| 574 | ================ | 
|---|
| 575 |  | 
|---|
| 576 | Try to make library functions reentrant.  If they need to do dynamic | 
|---|
| 577 | storage allocation, at least try to avoid any nonreentrancy aside from | 
|---|
| 578 | that of `malloc' itself. | 
|---|
| 579 |  | 
|---|
| 580 | Here are certain name conventions for libraries, to avoid name | 
|---|
| 581 | conflicts. | 
|---|
| 582 |  | 
|---|
| 583 | Choose a name prefix for the library, more than two characters long. | 
|---|
| 584 | All external function and variable names should start with this prefix. | 
|---|
| 585 | In addition, there should only be one of these in any given library | 
|---|
| 586 | member.  This usually means putting each one in a separate source file. | 
|---|
| 587 |  | 
|---|
| 588 | An exception can be made when two external symbols are always used | 
|---|
| 589 | together, so that no reasonable program could use one without the | 
|---|
| 590 | other; then they can both go in the same file. | 
|---|
| 591 |  | 
|---|
| 592 | External symbols that are not documented entry points for the user | 
|---|
| 593 | should have names beginning with `_'.  The `_' should be followed by | 
|---|
| 594 | the chosen name prefix for the library, to prevent collisions with | 
|---|
| 595 | other libraries.  These can go in the same files with user entry points | 
|---|
| 596 | if you like. | 
|---|
| 597 |  | 
|---|
| 598 | Static functions and variables can be used as you like and need not | 
|---|
| 599 | fit any naming convention. | 
|---|
| 600 |  | 
|---|
| 601 |  | 
|---|
| 602 | File: standards.info,  Node: Errors,  Next: User Interfaces,  Prev: Libraries,  Up: Program Behavior | 
|---|
| 603 |  | 
|---|
| 604 | Formatting Error Messages | 
|---|
| 605 | ========================= | 
|---|
| 606 |  | 
|---|
| 607 | Error messages from compilers should look like this: | 
|---|
| 608 |  | 
|---|
| 609 | SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO: MESSAGE | 
|---|
| 610 |  | 
|---|
| 611 | If you want to mention the column number, use this format: | 
|---|
| 612 |  | 
|---|
| 613 | SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO:COLUMN: MESSAGE | 
|---|
| 614 |  | 
|---|
| 615 | Line numbers should start from 1 at the beginning of the file, and | 
|---|
| 616 | column numbers should start from 1 at the beginning of the line.  (Both | 
|---|
| 617 | of these conventions are chosen for compatibility.)  Calculate column | 
|---|
| 618 | numbers assuming that space and all ASCII printing characters have | 
|---|
| 619 | equal width, and assuming tab stops every 8 columns. | 
|---|
| 620 |  | 
|---|
| 621 | Error messages from other noninteractive programs should look like | 
|---|
| 622 | this: | 
|---|
| 623 |  | 
|---|
| 624 | PROGRAM:SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO: MESSAGE | 
|---|
| 625 |  | 
|---|
| 626 | when there is an appropriate source file, or like this: | 
|---|
| 627 |  | 
|---|
| 628 | PROGRAM: MESSAGE | 
|---|
| 629 |  | 
|---|
| 630 | when there is no relevant source file. | 
|---|
| 631 |  | 
|---|
| 632 | If you want to mention the column number, use this format: | 
|---|
| 633 |  | 
|---|
| 634 | PROGRAM:SOURCE-FILE-NAME:LINENO:COLUMN: MESSAGE | 
|---|
| 635 |  | 
|---|
| 636 | In an interactive program (one that is reading commands from a | 
|---|
| 637 | terminal), it is better not to include the program name in an error | 
|---|
| 638 | message.  The place to indicate which program is running is in the | 
|---|
| 639 | prompt or with the screen layout.  (When the same program runs with | 
|---|
| 640 | input from a source other than a terminal, it is not interactive and | 
|---|
| 641 | would do best to print error messages using the noninteractive style.) | 
|---|
| 642 |  | 
|---|
| 643 | The string MESSAGE should not begin with a capital letter when it | 
|---|
| 644 | follows a program name and/or file name.  Also, it should not end with | 
|---|
| 645 | a period. | 
|---|
| 646 |  | 
|---|
| 647 | Error messages from interactive programs, and other messages such as | 
|---|
| 648 | usage messages, should start with a capital letter.  But they should not | 
|---|
| 649 | end with a period. | 
|---|
| 650 |  | 
|---|
| 651 |  | 
|---|
| 652 | File: standards.info,  Node: User Interfaces,  Next: Graphical Interfaces,  Prev: Errors,  Up: Program Behavior | 
|---|
| 653 |  | 
|---|
| 654 | Standards for Interfaces Generally | 
|---|
| 655 | ================================== | 
|---|
| 656 |  | 
|---|
| 657 | Please don't make the behavior of a utility depend on the name used | 
|---|
| 658 | to invoke it.  It is useful sometimes to make a link to a utility with | 
|---|
| 659 | a different name, and that should not change what it does. | 
|---|
| 660 |  | 
|---|
| 661 | Instead, use a run time option or a compilation switch or both to | 
|---|
| 662 | select among the alternate behaviors. | 
|---|
| 663 |  | 
|---|
| 664 | Likewise, please don't make the behavior of the program depend on the | 
|---|
| 665 | type of output device it is used with.  Device independence is an | 
|---|
| 666 | important principle of the system's design; do not compromise it merely | 
|---|
| 667 | to save someone from typing an option now and then.  (Variation in error | 
|---|
| 668 | message syntax when using a terminal is ok, because that is a side issue | 
|---|
| 669 | that people do not depend on.) | 
|---|
| 670 |  | 
|---|
| 671 | If you think one behavior is most useful when the output is to a | 
|---|
| 672 | terminal, and another is most useful when the output is a file or a | 
|---|
| 673 | pipe, then it is usually best to make the default behavior the one that | 
|---|
| 674 | is useful with output to a terminal, and have an option for the other | 
|---|
| 675 | behavior. | 
|---|
| 676 |  | 
|---|
| 677 | Compatibility requires certain programs to depend on the type of | 
|---|
| 678 | output device.  It would be disastrous if `ls' or `sh' did not do so in | 
|---|
| 679 | the way all users expect.  In some of these cases, we supplement the | 
|---|
| 680 | program with a preferred alternate version that does not depend on the | 
|---|
| 681 | output device type.  For example, we provide a `dir' program much like | 
|---|
| 682 | `ls' except that its default output format is always multi-column | 
|---|
| 683 | format. | 
|---|
| 684 |  | 
|---|
| 685 |  | 
|---|
| 686 | File: standards.info,  Node: Graphical Interfaces,  Next: Command-Line Interfaces,  Prev: User Interfaces,  Up: Program Behavior | 
|---|
| 687 |  | 
|---|
| 688 | Standards for Graphical Interfaces | 
|---|
| 689 | ================================== | 
|---|
| 690 |  | 
|---|
| 691 | When you write a program that provides a graphical user interface, | 
|---|
| 692 | please make it work with X Windows and the GTK toolkit unless the | 
|---|
| 693 | functionality specifically requires some alternative (for example, | 
|---|
| 694 | "displaying jpeg images while in console mode"). | 
|---|
| 695 |  | 
|---|
| 696 | In addition, please provide a command-line interface to control the | 
|---|
| 697 | functionality.  (In many cases, the graphical user interface can be a | 
|---|
| 698 | separate program which invokes the command-line program.)  This is so | 
|---|
| 699 | that the same jobs can be done from scripts. | 
|---|
| 700 |  | 
|---|
| 701 | Please also consider providing a CORBA interface (for use from | 
|---|
| 702 | GNOME), a library interface (for use from C), and perhaps a | 
|---|
| 703 | keyboard-driven console interface (for use by users from console mode). | 
|---|
| 704 | Once you are doing the work to provide the functionality and the | 
|---|
| 705 | graphical interface, these won't be much extra work. | 
|---|
| 706 |  | 
|---|
| 707 |  | 
|---|
| 708 | File: standards.info,  Node: Command-Line Interfaces,  Next: Option Table,  Prev: Graphical Interfaces,  Up: Program Behavior | 
|---|
| 709 |  | 
|---|
| 710 | Standards for Command Line Interfaces | 
|---|
| 711 | ===================================== | 
|---|
| 712 |  | 
|---|
| 713 | It is a good idea to follow the POSIX guidelines for the | 
|---|
| 714 | command-line options of a program.  The easiest way to do this is to use | 
|---|
| 715 | `getopt' to parse them.  Note that the GNU version of `getopt' will | 
|---|
| 716 | normally permit options anywhere among the arguments unless the special | 
|---|
| 717 | argument `--' is used.  This is not what POSIX specifies; it is a GNU | 
|---|
| 718 | extension. | 
|---|
| 719 |  | 
|---|
| 720 | Please define long-named options that are equivalent to the | 
|---|
| 721 | single-letter Unix-style options.  We hope to make GNU more user | 
|---|
| 722 | friendly this way.  This is easy to do with the GNU function | 
|---|
| 723 | `getopt_long'. | 
|---|
| 724 |  | 
|---|
| 725 | One of the advantages of long-named options is that they can be | 
|---|
| 726 | consistent from program to program.  For example, users should be able | 
|---|
| 727 | to expect the "verbose" option of any GNU program which has one, to be | 
|---|
| 728 | spelled precisely `--verbose'.  To achieve this uniformity, look at the | 
|---|
| 729 | table of common long-option names when you choose the option names for | 
|---|
| 730 | your program (*note Option Table::). | 
|---|
| 731 |  | 
|---|
| 732 | It is usually a good idea for file names given as ordinary arguments | 
|---|
| 733 | to be input files only; any output files would be specified using | 
|---|
| 734 | options (preferably `-o' or `--output').  Even if you allow an output | 
|---|
| 735 | file name as an ordinary argument for compatibility, try to provide an | 
|---|
| 736 | option as another way to specify it.  This will lead to more consistency | 
|---|
| 737 | among GNU utilities, and fewer idiosyncracies for users to remember. | 
|---|
| 738 |  | 
|---|
| 739 | All programs should support two standard options: `--version' and | 
|---|
| 740 | `--help'. | 
|---|
| 741 |  | 
|---|
| 742 | `--version' | 
|---|
| 743 | This option should direct the program to print information about | 
|---|
| 744 | its name, version, origin and legal status, all on standard | 
|---|
| 745 | output, and then exit successfully.  Other options and arguments | 
|---|
| 746 | should be ignored once this is seen, and the program should not | 
|---|
| 747 | perform its normal function. | 
|---|
| 748 |  | 
|---|
| 749 | The first line is meant to be easy for a program to parse; the | 
|---|
| 750 | version number proper starts after the last space.  In addition, | 
|---|
| 751 | it contains the canonical name for this program, in this format: | 
|---|
| 752 |  | 
|---|
| 753 | GNU Emacs 19.30 | 
|---|
| 754 |  | 
|---|
| 755 | The program's name should be a constant string; _don't_ compute it | 
|---|
| 756 | from `argv[0]'.  The idea is to state the standard or canonical | 
|---|
| 757 | name for the program, not its file name.  There are other ways to | 
|---|
| 758 | find out the precise file name where a command is found in `PATH'. | 
|---|
| 759 |  | 
|---|
| 760 | If the program is a subsidiary part of a larger package, mention | 
|---|
| 761 | the package name in parentheses, like this: | 
|---|
| 762 |  | 
|---|
| 763 | emacsserver (GNU Emacs) 19.30 | 
|---|
| 764 |  | 
|---|
| 765 | If the package has a version number which is different from this | 
|---|
| 766 | program's version number, you can mention the package version | 
|---|
| 767 | number just before the close-parenthesis. | 
|---|
| 768 |  | 
|---|
| 769 | If you *need* to mention the version numbers of libraries which | 
|---|
| 770 | are distributed separately from the package which contains this | 
|---|
| 771 | program, you can do so by printing an additional line of version | 
|---|
| 772 | info for each library you want to mention.  Use the same format | 
|---|
| 773 | for these lines as for the first line. | 
|---|
| 774 |  | 
|---|
| 775 | Please do not mention all of the libraries that the program uses | 
|---|
| 776 | "just for completeness"--that would produce a lot of unhelpful | 
|---|
| 777 | clutter.  Please mention library version numbers only if you find | 
|---|
| 778 | in practice that they are very important to you in debugging. | 
|---|
| 779 |  | 
|---|
| 780 | The following line, after the version number line or lines, should | 
|---|
| 781 | be a copyright notice.  If more than one copyright notice is | 
|---|
| 782 | called for, put each on a separate line. | 
|---|
| 783 |  | 
|---|
| 784 | Next should follow a brief statement that the program is free | 
|---|
| 785 | software, and that users are free to copy and change it on certain | 
|---|
| 786 | conditions.  If the program is covered by the GNU GPL, say so | 
|---|
| 787 | here.  Also mention that there is no warranty, to the extent | 
|---|
| 788 | permitted by law. | 
|---|
| 789 |  | 
|---|
| 790 | It is ok to finish the output with a list of the major authors of | 
|---|
| 791 | the program, as a way of giving credit. | 
|---|
| 792 |  | 
|---|
| 793 | Here's an example of output that follows these rules: | 
|---|
| 794 |  | 
|---|
| 795 | GNU Emacs 19.34.5 | 
|---|
| 796 | Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | 
|---|
| 797 | GNU Emacs comes with NO WARRANTY, | 
|---|
| 798 | to the extent permitted by law. | 
|---|
| 799 | You may redistribute copies of GNU Emacs | 
|---|
| 800 | under the terms of the GNU General Public License. | 
|---|
| 801 | For more information about these matters, | 
|---|
| 802 | see the files named COPYING. | 
|---|
| 803 |  | 
|---|
| 804 | You should adapt this to your program, of course, filling in the | 
|---|
| 805 | proper year, copyright holder, name of program, and the references | 
|---|
| 806 | to distribution terms, and changing the rest of the wording as | 
|---|
| 807 | necessary. | 
|---|
| 808 |  | 
|---|
| 809 | This copyright notice only needs to mention the most recent year in | 
|---|
| 810 | which changes were made--there's no need to list the years for | 
|---|
| 811 | previous versions' changes.  You don't have to mention the name of | 
|---|
| 812 | the program in these notices, if that is inconvenient, since it | 
|---|
| 813 | appeared in the first line. | 
|---|
| 814 |  | 
|---|
| 815 | Translations of the above lines must preserve the validity of the | 
|---|
| 816 | copyright notices (*note Internationalization::).  If the | 
|---|
| 817 | translation's character set supports it, the `(C)' should be | 
|---|
| 818 | replaced with the copyright symbol, as follows: | 
|---|
| 819 |  | 
|---|
| 820 | (the official copyright symbol, which is the letter C in a circle); | 
|---|
| 821 |  | 
|---|
| 822 | Write the word "Copyright" exactly like that, in English.  Do not | 
|---|
| 823 | translate it into another language.  International treaties | 
|---|
| 824 | recognize the English word "Copyright"; translations into other | 
|---|
| 825 | languages do not have legal significance. | 
|---|
| 826 |  | 
|---|
| 827 | `--help' | 
|---|
| 828 | This option should output brief documentation for how to invoke the | 
|---|
| 829 | program, on standard output, then exit successfully.  Other | 
|---|
| 830 | options and arguments should be ignored once this is seen, and the | 
|---|
| 831 | program should not perform its normal function. | 
|---|
| 832 |  | 
|---|
| 833 | Near the end of the `--help' option's output there should be a line | 
|---|
| 834 | that says where to mail bug reports.  It should have this format: | 
|---|
| 835 |  | 
|---|
| 836 | Report bugs to MAILING-ADDRESS. | 
|---|
| 837 |  | 
|---|
| 838 |  | 
|---|
| 839 | File: standards.info,  Node: Option Table,  Next: Memory Usage,  Prev: Command-Line Interfaces,  Up: Program Behavior | 
|---|
| 840 |  | 
|---|
| 841 | Table of Long Options | 
|---|
| 842 | ===================== | 
|---|
| 843 |  | 
|---|
| 844 | Here is a table of long options used by GNU programs.  It is surely | 
|---|
| 845 | incomplete, but we aim to list all the options that a new program might | 
|---|
| 846 | want to be compatible with.  If you use names not already in the table, | 
|---|
| 847 | please send <bug-standards@gnu.org> a list of them, with their | 
|---|
| 848 | meanings, so we can update the table. | 
|---|
| 849 |  | 
|---|
| 850 | `after-date' | 
|---|
| 851 | `-N' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 852 |  | 
|---|
| 853 | `all' | 
|---|
| 854 | `-a' in `du', `ls', `nm', `stty', `uname', and `unexpand'. | 
|---|
| 855 |  | 
|---|
| 856 | `all-text' | 
|---|
| 857 | `-a' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 858 |  | 
|---|
| 859 | `almost-all' | 
|---|
| 860 | `-A' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 861 |  | 
|---|
| 862 | `append' | 
|---|
| 863 | `-a' in `etags', `tee', `time'; `-r' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 864 |  | 
|---|
| 865 | `archive' | 
|---|
| 866 | `-a' in `cp'. | 
|---|
| 867 |  | 
|---|
| 868 | `archive-name' | 
|---|
| 869 | `-n' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 870 |  | 
|---|
| 871 | `arglength' | 
|---|
| 872 | `-l' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 873 |  | 
|---|
| 874 | `ascii' | 
|---|
| 875 | `-a' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 876 |  | 
|---|
| 877 | `assign' | 
|---|
| 878 | `-v' in `gawk'. | 
|---|
| 879 |  | 
|---|
| 880 | `assume-new' | 
|---|
| 881 | `-W' in Make. | 
|---|
| 882 |  | 
|---|
| 883 | `assume-old' | 
|---|
| 884 | `-o' in Make. | 
|---|
| 885 |  | 
|---|
| 886 | `auto-check' | 
|---|
| 887 | `-a' in `recode'. | 
|---|
| 888 |  | 
|---|
| 889 | `auto-pager' | 
|---|
| 890 | `-a' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 891 |  | 
|---|
| 892 | `auto-reference' | 
|---|
| 893 | `-A' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 894 |  | 
|---|
| 895 | `avoid-wraps' | 
|---|
| 896 | `-n' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 897 |  | 
|---|
| 898 | `background' | 
|---|
| 899 | For server programs, run in the background. | 
|---|
| 900 |  | 
|---|
| 901 | `backward-search' | 
|---|
| 902 | `-B' in `ctags'. | 
|---|
| 903 |  | 
|---|
| 904 | `basename' | 
|---|
| 905 | `-f' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 906 |  | 
|---|
| 907 | `batch' | 
|---|
| 908 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 909 |  | 
|---|
| 910 | `baud' | 
|---|
| 911 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 912 |  | 
|---|
| 913 | `before' | 
|---|
| 914 | `-b' in `tac'. | 
|---|
| 915 |  | 
|---|
| 916 | `binary' | 
|---|
| 917 | `-b' in `cpio' and `diff'. | 
|---|
| 918 |  | 
|---|
| 919 | `bits-per-code' | 
|---|
| 920 | `-b' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 921 |  | 
|---|
| 922 | `block-size' | 
|---|
| 923 | Used in `cpio' and `tar'. | 
|---|
| 924 |  | 
|---|
| 925 | `blocks' | 
|---|
| 926 | `-b' in `head' and `tail'. | 
|---|
| 927 |  | 
|---|
| 928 | `break-file' | 
|---|
| 929 | `-b' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 930 |  | 
|---|
| 931 | `brief' | 
|---|
| 932 | Used in various programs to make output shorter. | 
|---|
| 933 |  | 
|---|
| 934 | `bytes' | 
|---|
| 935 | `-c' in `head', `split', and `tail'. | 
|---|
| 936 |  | 
|---|
| 937 | `c++' | 
|---|
| 938 | `-C' in `etags'. | 
|---|
| 939 |  | 
|---|
| 940 | `catenate' | 
|---|
| 941 | `-A' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 942 |  | 
|---|
| 943 | `cd' | 
|---|
| 944 | Used in various programs to specify the directory to use. | 
|---|
| 945 |  | 
|---|
| 946 | `changes' | 
|---|
| 947 | `-c' in `chgrp' and `chown'. | 
|---|
| 948 |  | 
|---|
| 949 | `classify' | 
|---|
| 950 | `-F' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 951 |  | 
|---|
| 952 | `colons' | 
|---|
| 953 | `-c' in `recode'. | 
|---|
| 954 |  | 
|---|
| 955 | `command' | 
|---|
| 956 | `-c' in `su'; `-x' in GDB. | 
|---|
| 957 |  | 
|---|
| 958 | `compare' | 
|---|
| 959 | `-d' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 960 |  | 
|---|
| 961 | `compat' | 
|---|
| 962 | Used in `gawk'. | 
|---|
| 963 |  | 
|---|
| 964 | `compress' | 
|---|
| 965 | `-Z' in `tar' and `shar'. | 
|---|
| 966 |  | 
|---|
| 967 | `concatenate' | 
|---|
| 968 | `-A' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 969 |  | 
|---|
| 970 | `confirmation' | 
|---|
| 971 | `-w' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 972 |  | 
|---|
| 973 | `context' | 
|---|
| 974 | Used in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 975 |  | 
|---|
| 976 | `copyleft' | 
|---|
| 977 | `-W copyleft' in `gawk'. | 
|---|
| 978 |  | 
|---|
| 979 | `copyright' | 
|---|
| 980 | `-C' in `ptx', `recode', and `wdiff'; `-W copyright' in `gawk'. | 
|---|
| 981 |  | 
|---|
| 982 | `core' | 
|---|
| 983 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 984 |  | 
|---|
| 985 | `count' | 
|---|
| 986 | `-q' in `who'. | 
|---|
| 987 |  | 
|---|
| 988 | `count-links' | 
|---|
| 989 | `-l' in `du'. | 
|---|
| 990 |  | 
|---|
| 991 | `create' | 
|---|
| 992 | Used in `tar' and `cpio'. | 
|---|
| 993 |  | 
|---|
| 994 | `cut-mark' | 
|---|
| 995 | `-c' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 996 |  | 
|---|
| 997 | `cxref' | 
|---|
| 998 | `-x' in `ctags'. | 
|---|
| 999 |  | 
|---|
| 1000 | `date' | 
|---|
| 1001 | `-d' in `touch'. | 
|---|
| 1002 |  | 
|---|
| 1003 | `debug' | 
|---|
| 1004 | `-d' in Make and `m4'; `-t' in Bison. | 
|---|
| 1005 |  | 
|---|
| 1006 | `define' | 
|---|
| 1007 | `-D' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1008 |  | 
|---|
| 1009 | `defines' | 
|---|
| 1010 | `-d' in Bison and `ctags'. | 
|---|
| 1011 |  | 
|---|
| 1012 | `delete' | 
|---|
| 1013 | `-D' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1014 |  | 
|---|
| 1015 | `dereference' | 
|---|
| 1016 | `-L' in `chgrp', `chown', `cpio', `du', `ls', and `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1017 |  | 
|---|
| 1018 | `dereference-args' | 
|---|
| 1019 | `-D' in `du'. | 
|---|
| 1020 |  | 
|---|
| 1021 | `device' | 
|---|
| 1022 | Specify an I/O device (special file name). | 
|---|
| 1023 |  | 
|---|
| 1024 | `diacritics' | 
|---|
| 1025 | `-d' in `recode'. | 
|---|
| 1026 |  | 
|---|
| 1027 | `dictionary-order' | 
|---|
| 1028 | `-d' in `look'. | 
|---|
| 1029 |  | 
|---|
| 1030 | `diff' | 
|---|
| 1031 | `-d' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1032 |  | 
|---|
| 1033 | `digits' | 
|---|
| 1034 | `-n' in `csplit'. | 
|---|
| 1035 |  | 
|---|
| 1036 | `directory' | 
|---|
| 1037 | Specify the directory to use, in various programs.  In `ls', it | 
|---|
| 1038 | means to show directories themselves rather than their contents. | 
|---|
| 1039 | In `rm' and `ln', it means to not treat links to directories | 
|---|
| 1040 | specially. | 
|---|
| 1041 |  | 
|---|
| 1042 | `discard-all' | 
|---|
| 1043 | `-x' in `strip'. | 
|---|
| 1044 |  | 
|---|
| 1045 | `discard-locals' | 
|---|
| 1046 | `-X' in `strip'. | 
|---|
| 1047 |  | 
|---|
| 1048 | `dry-run' | 
|---|
| 1049 | `-n' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1050 |  | 
|---|
| 1051 | `ed' | 
|---|
| 1052 | `-e' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1053 |  | 
|---|
| 1054 | `elide-empty-files' | 
|---|
| 1055 | `-z' in `csplit'. | 
|---|
| 1056 |  | 
|---|
| 1057 | `end-delete' | 
|---|
| 1058 | `-x' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1059 |  | 
|---|
| 1060 | `end-insert' | 
|---|
| 1061 | `-z' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1062 |  | 
|---|
| 1063 | `entire-new-file' | 
|---|
| 1064 | `-N' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1065 |  | 
|---|
| 1066 | `environment-overrides' | 
|---|
| 1067 | `-e' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1068 |  | 
|---|
| 1069 | `eof' | 
|---|
| 1070 | `-e' in `xargs'. | 
|---|
| 1071 |  | 
|---|
| 1072 | `epoch' | 
|---|
| 1073 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 1074 |  | 
|---|
| 1075 | `error-limit' | 
|---|
| 1076 | Used in `makeinfo'. | 
|---|
| 1077 |  | 
|---|
| 1078 | `error-output' | 
|---|
| 1079 | `-o' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1080 |  | 
|---|
| 1081 | `escape' | 
|---|
| 1082 | `-b' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1083 |  | 
|---|
| 1084 | `exclude-from' | 
|---|
| 1085 | `-X' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1086 |  | 
|---|
| 1087 | `exec' | 
|---|
| 1088 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 1089 |  | 
|---|
| 1090 | `exit' | 
|---|
| 1091 | `-x' in `xargs'. | 
|---|
| 1092 |  | 
|---|
| 1093 | `exit-0' | 
|---|
| 1094 | `-e' in `unshar'. | 
|---|
| 1095 |  | 
|---|
| 1096 | `expand-tabs' | 
|---|
| 1097 | `-t' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1098 |  | 
|---|
| 1099 | `expression' | 
|---|
| 1100 | `-e' in `sed'. | 
|---|
| 1101 |  | 
|---|
| 1102 | `extern-only' | 
|---|
| 1103 | `-g' in `nm'. | 
|---|
| 1104 |  | 
|---|
| 1105 | `extract' | 
|---|
| 1106 | `-i' in `cpio'; `-x' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1107 |  | 
|---|
| 1108 | `faces' | 
|---|
| 1109 | `-f' in `finger'. | 
|---|
| 1110 |  | 
|---|
| 1111 | `fast' | 
|---|
| 1112 | `-f' in `su'. | 
|---|
| 1113 |  | 
|---|
| 1114 | `fatal-warnings' | 
|---|
| 1115 | `-E' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1116 |  | 
|---|
| 1117 | `file' | 
|---|
| 1118 | `-f' in `info', `gawk', Make, `mt', and `tar'; `-n' in `sed'; `-r' | 
|---|
| 1119 | in `touch'. | 
|---|
| 1120 |  | 
|---|
| 1121 | `field-separator' | 
|---|
| 1122 | `-F' in `gawk'. | 
|---|
| 1123 |  | 
|---|
| 1124 | `file-prefix' | 
|---|
| 1125 | `-b' in Bison. | 
|---|
| 1126 |  | 
|---|
| 1127 | `file-type' | 
|---|
| 1128 | `-F' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1129 |  | 
|---|
| 1130 | `files-from' | 
|---|
| 1131 | `-T' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1132 |  | 
|---|
| 1133 | `fill-column' | 
|---|
| 1134 | Used in `makeinfo'. | 
|---|
| 1135 |  | 
|---|
| 1136 | `flag-truncation' | 
|---|
| 1137 | `-F' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1138 |  | 
|---|
| 1139 | `fixed-output-files' | 
|---|
| 1140 | `-y' in Bison. | 
|---|
| 1141 |  | 
|---|
| 1142 | `follow' | 
|---|
| 1143 | `-f' in `tail'. | 
|---|
| 1144 |  | 
|---|
| 1145 | `footnote-style' | 
|---|
| 1146 | Used in `makeinfo'. | 
|---|
| 1147 |  | 
|---|
| 1148 | `force' | 
|---|
| 1149 | `-f' in `cp', `ln', `mv', and `rm'. | 
|---|
| 1150 |  | 
|---|
| 1151 | `force-prefix' | 
|---|
| 1152 | `-F' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1153 |  | 
|---|
| 1154 | `foreground' | 
|---|
| 1155 | For server programs, run in the foreground; in other words, don't | 
|---|
| 1156 | do anything special to run the server in the background. | 
|---|
| 1157 |  | 
|---|
| 1158 | `format' | 
|---|
| 1159 | Used in `ls', `time', and `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1160 |  | 
|---|
| 1161 | `freeze-state' | 
|---|
| 1162 | `-F' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1163 |  | 
|---|
| 1164 | `fullname' | 
|---|
| 1165 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 1166 |  | 
|---|
| 1167 | `gap-size' | 
|---|
| 1168 | `-g' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1169 |  | 
|---|
| 1170 | `get' | 
|---|
| 1171 | `-x' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1172 |  | 
|---|
| 1173 | `graphic' | 
|---|
| 1174 | `-i' in `ul'. | 
|---|
| 1175 |  | 
|---|
| 1176 | `graphics' | 
|---|
| 1177 | `-g' in `recode'. | 
|---|
| 1178 |  | 
|---|
| 1179 | `group' | 
|---|
| 1180 | `-g' in `install'. | 
|---|
| 1181 |  | 
|---|
| 1182 | `gzip' | 
|---|
| 1183 | `-z' in `tar' and `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1184 |  | 
|---|
| 1185 | `hashsize' | 
|---|
| 1186 | `-H' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1187 |  | 
|---|
| 1188 | `header' | 
|---|
| 1189 | `-h' in `objdump' and `recode' | 
|---|
| 1190 |  | 
|---|
| 1191 | `heading' | 
|---|
| 1192 | `-H' in `who'. | 
|---|
| 1193 |  | 
|---|
| 1194 | `help' | 
|---|
| 1195 | Used to ask for brief usage information. | 
|---|
| 1196 |  | 
|---|
| 1197 | `here-delimiter' | 
|---|
| 1198 | `-d' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1199 |  | 
|---|
| 1200 | `hide-control-chars' | 
|---|
| 1201 | `-q' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1202 |  | 
|---|
| 1203 | `html' | 
|---|
| 1204 | In `makeinfo', output HTML. | 
|---|
| 1205 |  | 
|---|
| 1206 | `idle' | 
|---|
| 1207 | `-u' in `who'. | 
|---|
| 1208 |  | 
|---|
| 1209 | `ifdef' | 
|---|
| 1210 | `-D' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1211 |  | 
|---|
| 1212 | `ignore' | 
|---|
| 1213 | `-I' in `ls'; `-x' in `recode'. | 
|---|
| 1214 |  | 
|---|
| 1215 | `ignore-all-space' | 
|---|
| 1216 | `-w' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1217 |  | 
|---|
| 1218 | `ignore-backups' | 
|---|
| 1219 | `-B' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1220 |  | 
|---|
| 1221 | `ignore-blank-lines' | 
|---|
| 1222 | `-B' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1223 |  | 
|---|
| 1224 | `ignore-case' | 
|---|
| 1225 | `-f' in `look' and `ptx'; `-i' in `diff' and `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1226 |  | 
|---|
| 1227 | `ignore-errors' | 
|---|
| 1228 | `-i' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1229 |  | 
|---|
| 1230 | `ignore-file' | 
|---|
| 1231 | `-i' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1232 |  | 
|---|
| 1233 | `ignore-indentation' | 
|---|
| 1234 | `-I' in `etags'. | 
|---|
| 1235 |  | 
|---|
| 1236 | `ignore-init-file' | 
|---|
| 1237 | `-f' in Oleo. | 
|---|
| 1238 |  | 
|---|
| 1239 | `ignore-interrupts' | 
|---|
| 1240 | `-i' in `tee'. | 
|---|
| 1241 |  | 
|---|
| 1242 | `ignore-matching-lines' | 
|---|
| 1243 | `-I' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1244 |  | 
|---|
| 1245 | `ignore-space-change' | 
|---|
| 1246 | `-b' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1247 |  | 
|---|
| 1248 | `ignore-zeros' | 
|---|
| 1249 | `-i' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1250 |  | 
|---|
| 1251 | `include' | 
|---|
| 1252 | `-i' in `etags'; `-I' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1253 |  | 
|---|
| 1254 | `include-dir' | 
|---|
| 1255 | `-I' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1256 |  | 
|---|
| 1257 | `incremental' | 
|---|
| 1258 | `-G' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1259 |  | 
|---|
| 1260 | `info' | 
|---|
| 1261 | `-i', `-l', and `-m' in Finger. | 
|---|
| 1262 |  | 
|---|
| 1263 | `init-file' | 
|---|
| 1264 | In some programs, specify the name of the file to read as the | 
|---|
| 1265 | user's init file. | 
|---|
| 1266 |  | 
|---|
| 1267 | `initial' | 
|---|
| 1268 | `-i' in `expand'. | 
|---|
| 1269 |  | 
|---|
| 1270 | `initial-tab' | 
|---|
| 1271 | `-T' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1272 |  | 
|---|
| 1273 | `inode' | 
|---|
| 1274 | `-i' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1275 |  | 
|---|
| 1276 | `interactive' | 
|---|
| 1277 | `-i' in `cp', `ln', `mv', `rm'; `-e' in `m4'; `-p' in `xargs'; | 
|---|
| 1278 | `-w' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1279 |  | 
|---|
| 1280 | `intermix-type' | 
|---|
| 1281 | `-p' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1282 |  | 
|---|
| 1283 | `iso-8601' | 
|---|
| 1284 | Used in `date' | 
|---|
| 1285 |  | 
|---|
| 1286 | `jobs' | 
|---|
| 1287 | `-j' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1288 |  | 
|---|
| 1289 | `just-print' | 
|---|
| 1290 | `-n' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1291 |  | 
|---|
| 1292 | `keep-going' | 
|---|
| 1293 | `-k' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1294 |  | 
|---|
| 1295 | `keep-files' | 
|---|
| 1296 | `-k' in `csplit'. | 
|---|
| 1297 |  | 
|---|
| 1298 | `kilobytes' | 
|---|
| 1299 | `-k' in `du' and `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1300 |  | 
|---|
| 1301 | `language' | 
|---|
| 1302 | `-l' in `etags'. | 
|---|
| 1303 |  | 
|---|
| 1304 | `less-mode' | 
|---|
| 1305 | `-l' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1306 |  | 
|---|
| 1307 | `level-for-gzip' | 
|---|
| 1308 | `-g' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1309 |  | 
|---|
| 1310 | `line-bytes' | 
|---|
| 1311 | `-C' in `split'. | 
|---|
| 1312 |  | 
|---|
| 1313 | `lines' | 
|---|
| 1314 | Used in `split', `head', and `tail'. | 
|---|
| 1315 |  | 
|---|
| 1316 | `link' | 
|---|
| 1317 | `-l' in `cpio'. | 
|---|
| 1318 |  | 
|---|
| 1319 | `lint' | 
|---|
| 1320 | `lint-old' | 
|---|
| 1321 | Used in `gawk'. | 
|---|
| 1322 |  | 
|---|
| 1323 | `list' | 
|---|
| 1324 | `-t' in `cpio'; `-l' in `recode'. | 
|---|
| 1325 |  | 
|---|
| 1326 | `list' | 
|---|
| 1327 | `-t' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1328 |  | 
|---|
| 1329 | `literal' | 
|---|
| 1330 | `-N' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1331 |  | 
|---|
| 1332 | `load-average' | 
|---|
| 1333 | `-l' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1334 |  | 
|---|
| 1335 | `login' | 
|---|
| 1336 | Used in `su'. | 
|---|
| 1337 |  | 
|---|
| 1338 | `machine' | 
|---|
| 1339 | No listing of which programs already use this; someone should | 
|---|
| 1340 | check to see if any actually do, and tell <gnu@gnu.org>. | 
|---|
| 1341 |  | 
|---|
| 1342 | `macro-name' | 
|---|
| 1343 | `-M' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1344 |  | 
|---|
| 1345 | `mail' | 
|---|
| 1346 | `-m' in `hello' and `uname'. | 
|---|
| 1347 |  | 
|---|
| 1348 | `make-directories' | 
|---|
| 1349 | `-d' in `cpio'. | 
|---|
| 1350 |  | 
|---|
| 1351 | `makefile' | 
|---|
| 1352 | `-f' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1353 |  | 
|---|
| 1354 | `mapped' | 
|---|
| 1355 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 1356 |  | 
|---|
| 1357 | `max-args' | 
|---|
| 1358 | `-n' in `xargs'. | 
|---|
| 1359 |  | 
|---|
| 1360 | `max-chars' | 
|---|
| 1361 | `-n' in `xargs'. | 
|---|
| 1362 |  | 
|---|
| 1363 | `max-lines' | 
|---|
| 1364 | `-l' in `xargs'. | 
|---|
| 1365 |  | 
|---|
| 1366 | `max-load' | 
|---|
| 1367 | `-l' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1368 |  | 
|---|
| 1369 | `max-procs' | 
|---|
| 1370 | `-P' in `xargs'. | 
|---|
| 1371 |  | 
|---|
| 1372 | `mesg' | 
|---|
| 1373 | `-T' in `who'. | 
|---|
| 1374 |  | 
|---|
| 1375 | `message' | 
|---|
| 1376 | `-T' in `who'. | 
|---|
| 1377 |  | 
|---|
| 1378 | `minimal' | 
|---|
| 1379 | `-d' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1380 |  | 
|---|
| 1381 | `mixed-uuencode' | 
|---|
| 1382 | `-M' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1383 |  | 
|---|
| 1384 | `mode' | 
|---|
| 1385 | `-m' in `install', `mkdir', and `mkfifo'. | 
|---|
| 1386 |  | 
|---|
| 1387 | `modification-time' | 
|---|
| 1388 | `-m' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1389 |  | 
|---|
| 1390 | `multi-volume' | 
|---|
| 1391 | `-M' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1392 |  | 
|---|
| 1393 | `name-prefix' | 
|---|
| 1394 | `-a' in Bison. | 
|---|
| 1395 |  | 
|---|
| 1396 | `nesting-limit' | 
|---|
| 1397 | `-L' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1398 |  | 
|---|
| 1399 | `net-headers' | 
|---|
| 1400 | `-a' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1401 |  | 
|---|
| 1402 | `new-file' | 
|---|
| 1403 | `-W' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1404 |  | 
|---|
| 1405 | `no-builtin-rules' | 
|---|
| 1406 | `-r' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1407 |  | 
|---|
| 1408 | `no-character-count' | 
|---|
| 1409 | `-w' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1410 |  | 
|---|
| 1411 | `no-check-existing' | 
|---|
| 1412 | `-x' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1413 |  | 
|---|
| 1414 | `no-common' | 
|---|
| 1415 | `-3' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1416 |  | 
|---|
| 1417 | `no-create' | 
|---|
| 1418 | `-c' in `touch'. | 
|---|
| 1419 |  | 
|---|
| 1420 | `no-defines' | 
|---|
| 1421 | `-D' in `etags'. | 
|---|
| 1422 |  | 
|---|
| 1423 | `no-deleted' | 
|---|
| 1424 | `-1' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1425 |  | 
|---|
| 1426 | `no-dereference' | 
|---|
| 1427 | `-d' in `cp'. | 
|---|
| 1428 |  | 
|---|
| 1429 | `no-inserted' | 
|---|
| 1430 | `-2' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1431 |  | 
|---|
| 1432 | `no-keep-going' | 
|---|
| 1433 | `-S' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1434 |  | 
|---|
| 1435 | `no-lines' | 
|---|
| 1436 | `-l' in Bison. | 
|---|
| 1437 |  | 
|---|
| 1438 | `no-piping' | 
|---|
| 1439 | `-P' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1440 |  | 
|---|
| 1441 | `no-prof' | 
|---|
| 1442 | `-e' in `gprof'. | 
|---|
| 1443 |  | 
|---|
| 1444 | `no-regex' | 
|---|
| 1445 | `-R' in `etags'. | 
|---|
| 1446 |  | 
|---|
| 1447 | `no-sort' | 
|---|
| 1448 | `-p' in `nm'. | 
|---|
| 1449 |  | 
|---|
| 1450 | `no-split' | 
|---|
| 1451 | Used in `makeinfo'. | 
|---|
| 1452 |  | 
|---|
| 1453 | `no-static' | 
|---|
| 1454 | `-a' in `gprof'. | 
|---|
| 1455 |  | 
|---|
| 1456 | `no-time' | 
|---|
| 1457 | `-E' in `gprof'. | 
|---|
| 1458 |  | 
|---|
| 1459 | `no-timestamp' | 
|---|
| 1460 | `-m' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1461 |  | 
|---|
| 1462 | `no-validate' | 
|---|
| 1463 | Used in `makeinfo'. | 
|---|
| 1464 |  | 
|---|
| 1465 | `no-wait' | 
|---|
| 1466 | Used in `emacsclient'. | 
|---|
| 1467 |  | 
|---|
| 1468 | `no-warn' | 
|---|
| 1469 | Used in various programs to inhibit warnings. | 
|---|
| 1470 |  | 
|---|
| 1471 | `node' | 
|---|
| 1472 | `-n' in `info'. | 
|---|
| 1473 |  | 
|---|
| 1474 | `nodename' | 
|---|
| 1475 | `-n' in `uname'. | 
|---|
| 1476 |  | 
|---|
| 1477 | `nonmatching' | 
|---|
| 1478 | `-f' in `cpio'. | 
|---|
| 1479 |  | 
|---|
| 1480 | `nstuff' | 
|---|
| 1481 | `-n' in `objdump'. | 
|---|
| 1482 |  | 
|---|
| 1483 | `null' | 
|---|
| 1484 | `-0' in `xargs'. | 
|---|
| 1485 |  | 
|---|
| 1486 | `number' | 
|---|
| 1487 | `-n' in `cat'. | 
|---|
| 1488 |  | 
|---|
| 1489 | `number-nonblank' | 
|---|
| 1490 | `-b' in `cat'. | 
|---|
| 1491 |  | 
|---|
| 1492 | `numeric-sort' | 
|---|
| 1493 | `-n' in `nm'. | 
|---|
| 1494 |  | 
|---|
| 1495 | `numeric-uid-gid' | 
|---|
| 1496 | `-n' in `cpio' and `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1497 |  | 
|---|
| 1498 | `nx' | 
|---|
| 1499 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 1500 |  | 
|---|
| 1501 | `old-archive' | 
|---|
| 1502 | `-o' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1503 |  | 
|---|
| 1504 | `old-file' | 
|---|
| 1505 | `-o' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1506 |  | 
|---|
| 1507 | `one-file-system' | 
|---|
| 1508 | `-l' in `tar', `cp', and `du'. | 
|---|
| 1509 |  | 
|---|
| 1510 | `only-file' | 
|---|
| 1511 | `-o' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1512 |  | 
|---|
| 1513 | `only-prof' | 
|---|
| 1514 | `-f' in `gprof'. | 
|---|
| 1515 |  | 
|---|
| 1516 | `only-time' | 
|---|
| 1517 | `-F' in `gprof'. | 
|---|
| 1518 |  | 
|---|
| 1519 | `options' | 
|---|
| 1520 | `-o' in `getopt', `fdlist', `fdmount', `fdmountd', and `fdumount'. | 
|---|
| 1521 |  | 
|---|
| 1522 | `output' | 
|---|
| 1523 | In various programs, specify the output file name. | 
|---|
| 1524 |  | 
|---|
| 1525 | `output-prefix' | 
|---|
| 1526 | `-o' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1527 |  | 
|---|
| 1528 | `override' | 
|---|
| 1529 | `-o' in `rm'. | 
|---|
| 1530 |  | 
|---|
| 1531 | `overwrite' | 
|---|
| 1532 | `-c' in `unshar'. | 
|---|
| 1533 |  | 
|---|
| 1534 | `owner' | 
|---|
| 1535 | `-o' in `install'. | 
|---|
| 1536 |  | 
|---|
| 1537 | `paginate' | 
|---|
| 1538 | `-l' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1539 |  | 
|---|
| 1540 | `paragraph-indent' | 
|---|
| 1541 | Used in `makeinfo'. | 
|---|
| 1542 |  | 
|---|
| 1543 | `parents' | 
|---|
| 1544 | `-p' in `mkdir' and `rmdir'. | 
|---|
| 1545 |  | 
|---|
| 1546 | `pass-all' | 
|---|
| 1547 | `-p' in `ul'. | 
|---|
| 1548 |  | 
|---|
| 1549 | `pass-through' | 
|---|
| 1550 | `-p' in `cpio'. | 
|---|
| 1551 |  | 
|---|
| 1552 | `port' | 
|---|
| 1553 | `-P' in `finger'. | 
|---|
| 1554 |  | 
|---|
| 1555 | `portability' | 
|---|
| 1556 | `-c' in `cpio' and `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1557 |  | 
|---|
| 1558 | `posix' | 
|---|
| 1559 | Used in `gawk'. | 
|---|
| 1560 |  | 
|---|
| 1561 | `prefix-builtins' | 
|---|
| 1562 | `-P' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1563 |  | 
|---|
| 1564 | `prefix' | 
|---|
| 1565 | `-f' in `csplit'. | 
|---|
| 1566 |  | 
|---|
| 1567 | `preserve' | 
|---|
| 1568 | Used in `tar' and `cp'. | 
|---|
| 1569 |  | 
|---|
| 1570 | `preserve-environment' | 
|---|
| 1571 | `-p' in `su'. | 
|---|
| 1572 |  | 
|---|
| 1573 | `preserve-modification-time' | 
|---|
| 1574 | `-m' in `cpio'. | 
|---|
| 1575 |  | 
|---|
| 1576 | `preserve-order' | 
|---|
| 1577 | `-s' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1578 |  | 
|---|
| 1579 | `preserve-permissions' | 
|---|
| 1580 | `-p' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1581 |  | 
|---|
| 1582 | `print' | 
|---|
| 1583 | `-l' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1584 |  | 
|---|
| 1585 | `print-chars' | 
|---|
| 1586 | `-L' in `cmp'. | 
|---|
| 1587 |  | 
|---|
| 1588 | `print-data-base' | 
|---|
| 1589 | `-p' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1590 |  | 
|---|
| 1591 | `print-directory' | 
|---|
| 1592 | `-w' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1593 |  | 
|---|
| 1594 | `print-file-name' | 
|---|
| 1595 | `-o' in `nm'. | 
|---|
| 1596 |  | 
|---|
| 1597 | `print-symdefs' | 
|---|
| 1598 | `-s' in `nm'. | 
|---|
| 1599 |  | 
|---|
| 1600 | `printer' | 
|---|
| 1601 | `-p' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1602 |  | 
|---|
| 1603 | `prompt' | 
|---|
| 1604 | `-p' in `ed'. | 
|---|
| 1605 |  | 
|---|
| 1606 | `proxy' | 
|---|
| 1607 | Specify an HTTP proxy. | 
|---|
| 1608 |  | 
|---|
| 1609 | `query-user' | 
|---|
| 1610 | `-X' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1611 |  | 
|---|
| 1612 | `question' | 
|---|
| 1613 | `-q' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1614 |  | 
|---|
| 1615 | `quiet' | 
|---|
| 1616 | Used in many programs to inhibit the usual output.  *Note:* every | 
|---|
| 1617 | program accepting `--quiet' should accept `--silent' as a synonym. | 
|---|
| 1618 |  | 
|---|
| 1619 | `quiet-unshar' | 
|---|
| 1620 | `-Q' in `shar' | 
|---|
| 1621 |  | 
|---|
| 1622 | `quote-name' | 
|---|
| 1623 | `-Q' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1624 |  | 
|---|
| 1625 | `rcs' | 
|---|
| 1626 | `-n' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1627 |  | 
|---|
| 1628 | `re-interval' | 
|---|
| 1629 | Used in `gawk'. | 
|---|
| 1630 |  | 
|---|
| 1631 | `read-full-blocks' | 
|---|
| 1632 | `-B' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1633 |  | 
|---|
| 1634 | `readnow' | 
|---|
| 1635 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 1636 |  | 
|---|
| 1637 | `recon' | 
|---|
| 1638 | `-n' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1639 |  | 
|---|
| 1640 | `record-number' | 
|---|
| 1641 | `-R' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1642 |  | 
|---|
| 1643 | `recursive' | 
|---|
| 1644 | Used in `chgrp', `chown', `cp', `ls', `diff', and `rm'. | 
|---|
| 1645 |  | 
|---|
| 1646 | `reference-limit' | 
|---|
| 1647 | Used in `makeinfo'. | 
|---|
| 1648 |  | 
|---|
| 1649 | `references' | 
|---|
| 1650 | `-r' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1651 |  | 
|---|
| 1652 | `regex' | 
|---|
| 1653 | `-r' in `tac' and `etags'. | 
|---|
| 1654 |  | 
|---|
| 1655 | `release' | 
|---|
| 1656 | `-r' in `uname'. | 
|---|
| 1657 |  | 
|---|
| 1658 | `reload-state' | 
|---|
| 1659 | `-R' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1660 |  | 
|---|
| 1661 | `relocation' | 
|---|
| 1662 | `-r' in `objdump'. | 
|---|
| 1663 |  | 
|---|
| 1664 | `rename' | 
|---|
| 1665 | `-r' in `cpio'. | 
|---|
| 1666 |  | 
|---|
| 1667 | `replace' | 
|---|
| 1668 | `-i' in `xargs'. | 
|---|
| 1669 |  | 
|---|
| 1670 | `report-identical-files' | 
|---|
| 1671 | `-s' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1672 |  | 
|---|
| 1673 | `reset-access-time' | 
|---|
| 1674 | `-a' in `cpio'. | 
|---|
| 1675 |  | 
|---|
| 1676 | `reverse' | 
|---|
| 1677 | `-r' in `ls' and `nm'. | 
|---|
| 1678 |  | 
|---|
| 1679 | `reversed-ed' | 
|---|
| 1680 | `-f' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1681 |  | 
|---|
| 1682 | `right-side-defs' | 
|---|
| 1683 | `-R' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1684 |  | 
|---|
| 1685 | `same-order' | 
|---|
| 1686 | `-s' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1687 |  | 
|---|
| 1688 | `same-permissions' | 
|---|
| 1689 | `-p' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1690 |  | 
|---|
| 1691 | `save' | 
|---|
| 1692 | `-g' in `stty'. | 
|---|
| 1693 |  | 
|---|
| 1694 | `se' | 
|---|
| 1695 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 1696 |  | 
|---|
| 1697 | `sentence-regexp' | 
|---|
| 1698 | `-S' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1699 |  | 
|---|
| 1700 | `separate-dirs' | 
|---|
| 1701 | `-S' in `du'. | 
|---|
| 1702 |  | 
|---|
| 1703 | `separator' | 
|---|
| 1704 | `-s' in `tac'. | 
|---|
| 1705 |  | 
|---|
| 1706 | `sequence' | 
|---|
| 1707 | Used by `recode' to chose files or pipes for sequencing passes. | 
|---|
| 1708 |  | 
|---|
| 1709 | `shell' | 
|---|
| 1710 | `-s' in `su'. | 
|---|
| 1711 |  | 
|---|
| 1712 | `show-all' | 
|---|
| 1713 | `-A' in `cat'. | 
|---|
| 1714 |  | 
|---|
| 1715 | `show-c-function' | 
|---|
| 1716 | `-p' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1717 |  | 
|---|
| 1718 | `show-ends' | 
|---|
| 1719 | `-E' in `cat'. | 
|---|
| 1720 |  | 
|---|
| 1721 | `show-function-line' | 
|---|
| 1722 | `-F' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1723 |  | 
|---|
| 1724 | `show-tabs' | 
|---|
| 1725 | `-T' in `cat'. | 
|---|
| 1726 |  | 
|---|
| 1727 | `silent' | 
|---|
| 1728 | Used in many programs to inhibit the usual output.  *Note:* every | 
|---|
| 1729 | program accepting `--silent' should accept `--quiet' as a synonym. | 
|---|
| 1730 |  | 
|---|
| 1731 | `size' | 
|---|
| 1732 | `-s' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1733 |  | 
|---|
| 1734 | `socket' | 
|---|
| 1735 | Specify a file descriptor for a network server to use for its | 
|---|
| 1736 | socket, instead of opening and binding a new socket.  This | 
|---|
| 1737 | provides a way to run, in a nonpriveledged process, a server that | 
|---|
| 1738 | normally needs a reserved port number. | 
|---|
| 1739 |  | 
|---|
| 1740 | `sort' | 
|---|
| 1741 | Used in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1742 |  | 
|---|
| 1743 | `source' | 
|---|
| 1744 | `-W source' in `gawk'. | 
|---|
| 1745 |  | 
|---|
| 1746 | `sparse' | 
|---|
| 1747 | `-S' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1748 |  | 
|---|
| 1749 | `speed-large-files' | 
|---|
| 1750 | `-H' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1751 |  | 
|---|
| 1752 | `split-at' | 
|---|
| 1753 | `-E' in `unshar'. | 
|---|
| 1754 |  | 
|---|
| 1755 | `split-size-limit' | 
|---|
| 1756 | `-L' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1757 |  | 
|---|
| 1758 | `squeeze-blank' | 
|---|
| 1759 | `-s' in `cat'. | 
|---|
| 1760 |  | 
|---|
| 1761 | `start-delete' | 
|---|
| 1762 | `-w' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1763 |  | 
|---|
| 1764 | `start-insert' | 
|---|
| 1765 | `-y' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1766 |  | 
|---|
| 1767 | `starting-file' | 
|---|
| 1768 | Used in `tar' and `diff' to specify which file within a directory | 
|---|
| 1769 | to start processing with. | 
|---|
| 1770 |  | 
|---|
| 1771 | `statistics' | 
|---|
| 1772 | `-s' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1773 |  | 
|---|
| 1774 | `stdin-file-list' | 
|---|
| 1775 | `-S' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1776 |  | 
|---|
| 1777 | `stop' | 
|---|
| 1778 | `-S' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1779 |  | 
|---|
| 1780 | `strict' | 
|---|
| 1781 | `-s' in `recode'. | 
|---|
| 1782 |  | 
|---|
| 1783 | `strip' | 
|---|
| 1784 | `-s' in `install'. | 
|---|
| 1785 |  | 
|---|
| 1786 | `strip-all' | 
|---|
| 1787 | `-s' in `strip'. | 
|---|
| 1788 |  | 
|---|
| 1789 | `strip-debug' | 
|---|
| 1790 | `-S' in `strip'. | 
|---|
| 1791 |  | 
|---|
| 1792 | `submitter' | 
|---|
| 1793 | `-s' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1794 |  | 
|---|
| 1795 | `suffix' | 
|---|
| 1796 | `-S' in `cp', `ln', `mv'. | 
|---|
| 1797 |  | 
|---|
| 1798 | `suffix-format' | 
|---|
| 1799 | `-b' in `csplit'. | 
|---|
| 1800 |  | 
|---|
| 1801 | `sum' | 
|---|
| 1802 | `-s' in `gprof'. | 
|---|
| 1803 |  | 
|---|
| 1804 | `summarize' | 
|---|
| 1805 | `-s' in `du'. | 
|---|
| 1806 |  | 
|---|
| 1807 | `symbolic' | 
|---|
| 1808 | `-s' in `ln'. | 
|---|
| 1809 |  | 
|---|
| 1810 | `symbols' | 
|---|
| 1811 | Used in GDB and `objdump'. | 
|---|
| 1812 |  | 
|---|
| 1813 | `synclines' | 
|---|
| 1814 | `-s' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1815 |  | 
|---|
| 1816 | `sysname' | 
|---|
| 1817 | `-s' in `uname'. | 
|---|
| 1818 |  | 
|---|
| 1819 | `tabs' | 
|---|
| 1820 | `-t' in `expand' and `unexpand'. | 
|---|
| 1821 |  | 
|---|
| 1822 | `tabsize' | 
|---|
| 1823 | `-T' in `ls'. | 
|---|
| 1824 |  | 
|---|
| 1825 | `terminal' | 
|---|
| 1826 | `-T' in `tput' and `ul'.  `-t' in `wdiff'. | 
|---|
| 1827 |  | 
|---|
| 1828 | `text' | 
|---|
| 1829 | `-a' in `diff'. | 
|---|
| 1830 |  | 
|---|
| 1831 | `text-files' | 
|---|
| 1832 | `-T' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1833 |  | 
|---|
| 1834 | `time' | 
|---|
| 1835 | Used in `ls' and `touch'. | 
|---|
| 1836 |  | 
|---|
| 1837 | `timeout' | 
|---|
| 1838 | Specify how long to wait before giving up on some operation. | 
|---|
| 1839 |  | 
|---|
| 1840 | `to-stdout' | 
|---|
| 1841 | `-O' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1842 |  | 
|---|
| 1843 | `total' | 
|---|
| 1844 | `-c' in `du'. | 
|---|
| 1845 |  | 
|---|
| 1846 | `touch' | 
|---|
| 1847 | `-t' in Make, `ranlib', and `recode'. | 
|---|
| 1848 |  | 
|---|
| 1849 | `trace' | 
|---|
| 1850 | `-t' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1851 |  | 
|---|
| 1852 | `traditional' | 
|---|
| 1853 | `-t' in `hello'; `-W traditional' in `gawk'; `-G' in `ed', `m4', | 
|---|
| 1854 | and `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1855 |  | 
|---|
| 1856 | `tty' | 
|---|
| 1857 | Used in GDB. | 
|---|
| 1858 |  | 
|---|
| 1859 | `typedefs' | 
|---|
| 1860 | `-t' in `ctags'. | 
|---|
| 1861 |  | 
|---|
| 1862 | `typedefs-and-c++' | 
|---|
| 1863 | `-T' in `ctags'. | 
|---|
| 1864 |  | 
|---|
| 1865 | `typeset-mode' | 
|---|
| 1866 | `-t' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1867 |  | 
|---|
| 1868 | `uncompress' | 
|---|
| 1869 | `-z' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1870 |  | 
|---|
| 1871 | `unconditional' | 
|---|
| 1872 | `-u' in `cpio'. | 
|---|
| 1873 |  | 
|---|
| 1874 | `undefine' | 
|---|
| 1875 | `-U' in `m4'. | 
|---|
| 1876 |  | 
|---|
| 1877 | `undefined-only' | 
|---|
| 1878 | `-u' in `nm'. | 
|---|
| 1879 |  | 
|---|
| 1880 | `update' | 
|---|
| 1881 | `-u' in `cp', `ctags', `mv', `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1882 |  | 
|---|
| 1883 | `usage' | 
|---|
| 1884 | Used in `gawk'; same as `--help'. | 
|---|
| 1885 |  | 
|---|
| 1886 | `uuencode' | 
|---|
| 1887 | `-B' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1888 |  | 
|---|
| 1889 | `vanilla-operation' | 
|---|
| 1890 | `-V' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1891 |  | 
|---|
| 1892 | `verbose' | 
|---|
| 1893 | Print more information about progress.  Many programs support this. | 
|---|
| 1894 |  | 
|---|
| 1895 | `verify' | 
|---|
| 1896 | `-W' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1897 |  | 
|---|
| 1898 | `version' | 
|---|
| 1899 | Print the version number. | 
|---|
| 1900 |  | 
|---|
| 1901 | `version-control' | 
|---|
| 1902 | `-V' in `cp', `ln', `mv'. | 
|---|
| 1903 |  | 
|---|
| 1904 | `vgrind' | 
|---|
| 1905 | `-v' in `ctags'. | 
|---|
| 1906 |  | 
|---|
| 1907 | `volume' | 
|---|
| 1908 | `-V' in `tar'. | 
|---|
| 1909 |  | 
|---|
| 1910 | `what-if' | 
|---|
| 1911 | `-W' in Make. | 
|---|
| 1912 |  | 
|---|
| 1913 | `whole-size-limit' | 
|---|
| 1914 | `-l' in `shar'. | 
|---|
| 1915 |  | 
|---|
| 1916 | `width' | 
|---|
| 1917 | `-w' in `ls' and `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1918 |  | 
|---|
| 1919 | `word-regexp' | 
|---|
| 1920 | `-W' in `ptx'. | 
|---|
| 1921 |  | 
|---|
| 1922 | `writable' | 
|---|
| 1923 | `-T' in `who'. | 
|---|
| 1924 |  | 
|---|
| 1925 | `zeros' | 
|---|
| 1926 | `-z' in `gprof'. | 
|---|
| 1927 |  | 
|---|
| 1928 |  | 
|---|
| 1929 | File: standards.info,  Node: Memory Usage,  Next: File Usage,  Prev: Option Table,  Up: Program Behavior | 
|---|
| 1930 |  | 
|---|
| 1931 | Memory Usage | 
|---|
| 1932 | ============ | 
|---|
| 1933 |  | 
|---|
| 1934 | If a program typically uses just a few meg of memory, don't bother | 
|---|
| 1935 | making any effort to reduce memory usage.  For example, if it is | 
|---|
| 1936 | impractical for other reasons to operate on files more than a few meg | 
|---|
| 1937 | long, it is reasonable to read entire input files into core to operate | 
|---|
| 1938 | on them. | 
|---|
| 1939 |  | 
|---|
| 1940 | However, for programs such as `cat' or `tail', that can usefully | 
|---|
| 1941 | operate on very large files, it is important to avoid using a technique | 
|---|
| 1942 | that would artificially limit the size of files it can handle.  If a | 
|---|
| 1943 | program works by lines and could be applied to arbitrary user-supplied | 
|---|
| 1944 | input files, it should keep only a line in memory, because this is not | 
|---|
| 1945 | very hard and users will want to be able to operate on input files that | 
|---|
| 1946 | are bigger than will fit in core all at once. | 
|---|
| 1947 |  | 
|---|
| 1948 | If your program creates complicated data structures, just make them | 
|---|
| 1949 | in core and give a fatal error if `malloc' returns zero. | 
|---|
| 1950 |  | 
|---|
| 1951 |  | 
|---|
| 1952 | File: standards.info,  Node: File Usage,  Prev: Memory Usage,  Up: Program Behavior | 
|---|
| 1953 |  | 
|---|
| 1954 | File Usage | 
|---|
| 1955 | ========== | 
|---|
| 1956 |  | 
|---|
| 1957 | Programs should be prepared to operate when `/usr' and `/etc' are | 
|---|
| 1958 | read-only file systems.  Thus, if the program manages log files, lock | 
|---|
| 1959 | files, backup files, score files, or any other files which are modified | 
|---|
| 1960 | for internal purposes, these files should not be stored in `/usr' or | 
|---|
| 1961 | `/etc'. | 
|---|
| 1962 |  | 
|---|
| 1963 | There are two exceptions.  `/etc' is used to store system | 
|---|
| 1964 | configuration information; it is reasonable for a program to modify | 
|---|
| 1965 | files in `/etc' when its job is to update the system configuration. | 
|---|
| 1966 | Also, if the user explicitly asks to modify one file in a directory, it | 
|---|
| 1967 | is reasonable for the program to store other files in the same | 
|---|
| 1968 | directory. | 
|---|
| 1969 |  | 
|---|
| 1970 |  | 
|---|
| 1971 | File: standards.info,  Node: Writing C,  Next: Documentation,  Prev: Program Behavior,  Up: Top | 
|---|
| 1972 |  | 
|---|
| 1973 | Making The Best Use of C | 
|---|
| 1974 | ************************ | 
|---|
| 1975 |  | 
|---|
| 1976 | This node provides advice on how best to use the C language when | 
|---|
| 1977 | writing GNU software. | 
|---|
| 1978 |  | 
|---|
| 1979 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 1980 |  | 
|---|
| 1981 | * Formatting::                  Formatting Your Source Code | 
|---|
| 1982 | * Comments::                    Commenting Your Work | 
|---|
| 1983 | * Syntactic Conventions::       Clean Use of C Constructs | 
|---|
| 1984 | * Names::                       Naming Variables, Functions, and Files | 
|---|
| 1985 | * System Portability::          Portability between different operating systems | 
|---|
| 1986 | * CPU Portability::             Supporting the range of CPU types | 
|---|
| 1987 | * System Functions::            Portability and ``standard'' library functions | 
|---|
| 1988 | * Internationalization::        Techniques for internationalization | 
|---|
| 1989 | * Mmap::                        How you can safely use `mmap'. | 
|---|
| 1990 |  | 
|---|
| 1991 |  | 
|---|
| 1992 | File: standards.info,  Node: Formatting,  Next: Comments,  Up: Writing C | 
|---|
| 1993 |  | 
|---|
| 1994 | Formatting Your Source Code | 
|---|
| 1995 | =========================== | 
|---|
| 1996 |  | 
|---|
| 1997 | It is important to put the open-brace that starts the body of a C | 
|---|
| 1998 | function in column zero, and avoid putting any other open-brace or | 
|---|
| 1999 | open-parenthesis or open-bracket in column zero.  Several tools look | 
|---|
| 2000 | for open-braces in column zero to find the beginnings of C functions. | 
|---|
| 2001 | These tools will not work on code not formatted that way. | 
|---|
| 2002 |  | 
|---|
| 2003 | It is also important for function definitions to start the name of | 
|---|
| 2004 | the function in column zero.  This helps people to search for function | 
|---|
| 2005 | definitions, and may also help certain tools recognize them.  Thus, the | 
|---|
| 2006 | proper format is this: | 
|---|
| 2007 |  | 
|---|
| 2008 | static char * | 
|---|
| 2009 | concat (s1, s2)        /* Name starts in column zero here */ | 
|---|
| 2010 | char *s1, *s2; | 
|---|
| 2011 | {                     /* Open brace in column zero here */ | 
|---|
| 2012 | ... | 
|---|
| 2013 | } | 
|---|
| 2014 |  | 
|---|
| 2015 | or, if you want to use Standard C syntax, format the definition like | 
|---|
| 2016 | this: | 
|---|
| 2017 |  | 
|---|
| 2018 | static char * | 
|---|
| 2019 | concat (char *s1, char *s2) | 
|---|
| 2020 | { | 
|---|
| 2021 | ... | 
|---|
| 2022 | } | 
|---|
| 2023 |  | 
|---|
| 2024 | In Standard C, if the arguments don't fit nicely on one line, split | 
|---|
| 2025 | it like this: | 
|---|
| 2026 |  | 
|---|
| 2027 | int | 
|---|
| 2028 | lots_of_args (int an_integer, long a_long, short a_short, | 
|---|
| 2029 | double a_double, float a_float) | 
|---|
| 2030 | ... | 
|---|
| 2031 |  | 
|---|
| 2032 | The rest of this section gives our recommendations for other aspects | 
|---|
| 2033 | of C formatting style, which is also the default style of the `indent' | 
|---|
| 2034 | program in version 1.2 and newer.  It corresponds to the options | 
|---|
| 2035 |  | 
|---|
| 2036 | -nbad -bap -nbc -bbo -bl -bli2 -bls -ncdb -nce -cp1 -cs -di2 | 
|---|
| 2037 | -ndj -nfc1 -nfca -hnl -i2 -ip5 -lp -pcs -psl -nsc -nsob | 
|---|
| 2038 |  | 
|---|
| 2039 | We don't think of these recommendations as requirements, because it | 
|---|
| 2040 | causes no problems for users if two different programs have different | 
|---|
| 2041 | formatting styles. | 
|---|
| 2042 |  | 
|---|
| 2043 | But whatever style you use, please use it consistently, since a | 
|---|
| 2044 | mixture of styles within one program tends to look ugly.  If you are | 
|---|
| 2045 | contributing changes to an existing program, please follow the style of | 
|---|
| 2046 | that program. | 
|---|
| 2047 |  | 
|---|
| 2048 | For the body of the function, our recommended style looks like this: | 
|---|
| 2049 |  | 
|---|
| 2050 | if (x < foo (y, z)) | 
|---|
| 2051 | haha = bar[4] + 5; | 
|---|
| 2052 | else | 
|---|
| 2053 | { | 
|---|
| 2054 | while (z) | 
|---|
| 2055 | { | 
|---|
| 2056 | haha += foo (z, z); | 
|---|
| 2057 | z--; | 
|---|
| 2058 | } | 
|---|
| 2059 | return ++x + bar (); | 
|---|
| 2060 | } | 
|---|
| 2061 |  | 
|---|
| 2062 | We find it easier to read a program when it has spaces before the | 
|---|
| 2063 | open-parentheses and after the commas.  Especially after the commas. | 
|---|
| 2064 |  | 
|---|
| 2065 | When you split an expression into multiple lines, split it before an | 
|---|
| 2066 | operator, not after one.  Here is the right way: | 
|---|
| 2067 |  | 
|---|
| 2068 | if (foo_this_is_long && bar > win (x, y, z) | 
|---|
| 2069 | && remaining_condition) | 
|---|
| 2070 |  | 
|---|
| 2071 | Try to avoid having two operators of different precedence at the same | 
|---|
| 2072 | level of indentation.  For example, don't write this: | 
|---|
| 2073 |  | 
|---|
| 2074 | mode = (inmode[j] == VOIDmode | 
|---|
| 2075 | || GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode[j]) > GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode[j]) | 
|---|
| 2076 | ? outmode[j] : inmode[j]); | 
|---|
| 2077 |  | 
|---|
| 2078 | Instead, use extra parentheses so that the indentation shows the | 
|---|
| 2079 | nesting: | 
|---|
| 2080 |  | 
|---|
| 2081 | mode = ((inmode[j] == VOIDmode | 
|---|
| 2082 | || (GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode[j]) > GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode[j]))) | 
|---|
| 2083 | ? outmode[j] : inmode[j]); | 
|---|
| 2084 |  | 
|---|
| 2085 | Insert extra parentheses so that Emacs will indent the code properly. | 
|---|
| 2086 | For example, the following indentation looks nice if you do it by hand, | 
|---|
| 2087 |  | 
|---|
| 2088 | v = rup->ru_utime.tv_sec*1000 + rup->ru_utime.tv_usec/1000 | 
|---|
| 2089 | + rup->ru_stime.tv_sec*1000 + rup->ru_stime.tv_usec/1000; | 
|---|
| 2090 |  | 
|---|
| 2091 | but Emacs would alter it.  Adding a set of parentheses produces | 
|---|
| 2092 | something that looks equally nice, and which Emacs will preserve: | 
|---|
| 2093 |  | 
|---|
| 2094 | v = (rup->ru_utime.tv_sec*1000 + rup->ru_utime.tv_usec/1000 | 
|---|
| 2095 | + rup->ru_stime.tv_sec*1000 + rup->ru_stime.tv_usec/1000); | 
|---|
| 2096 |  | 
|---|
| 2097 | Format do-while statements like this: | 
|---|
| 2098 |  | 
|---|
| 2099 | do | 
|---|
| 2100 | { | 
|---|
| 2101 | a = foo (a); | 
|---|
| 2102 | } | 
|---|
| 2103 | while (a > 0); | 
|---|
| 2104 |  | 
|---|
| 2105 | Please use formfeed characters (control-L) to divide the program into | 
|---|
| 2106 | pages at logical places (but not within a function).  It does not matter | 
|---|
| 2107 | just how long the pages are, since they do not have to fit on a printed | 
|---|
| 2108 | page.  The formfeeds should appear alone on lines by themselves. | 
|---|
| 2109 |  | 
|---|
| 2110 |  | 
|---|
| 2111 | File: standards.info,  Node: Comments,  Next: Syntactic Conventions,  Prev: Formatting,  Up: Writing C | 
|---|
| 2112 |  | 
|---|
| 2113 | Commenting Your Work | 
|---|
| 2114 | ==================== | 
|---|
| 2115 |  | 
|---|
| 2116 | Every program should start with a comment saying briefly what it is | 
|---|
| 2117 | for.  Example: `fmt - filter for simple filling of text'. | 
|---|
| 2118 |  | 
|---|
| 2119 | Please write the comments in a GNU program in English, because | 
|---|
| 2120 | English is the one language that nearly all programmers in all | 
|---|
| 2121 | countries can read.  If you do not write English well, please write | 
|---|
| 2122 | comments in English as well as you can, then ask other people to help | 
|---|
| 2123 | rewrite them.  If you can't write comments in English, please find | 
|---|
| 2124 | someone to work with you and translate your comments into English. | 
|---|
| 2125 |  | 
|---|
| 2126 | Please put a comment on each function saying what the function does, | 
|---|
| 2127 | what sorts of arguments it gets, and what the possible values of | 
|---|
| 2128 | arguments mean and are used for.  It is not necessary to duplicate in | 
|---|
| 2129 | words the meaning of the C argument declarations, if a C type is being | 
|---|
| 2130 | used in its customary fashion.  If there is anything nonstandard about | 
|---|
| 2131 | its use (such as an argument of type `char *' which is really the | 
|---|
| 2132 | address of the second character of a string, not the first), or any | 
|---|
| 2133 | possible values that would not work the way one would expect (such as, | 
|---|
| 2134 | that strings containing newlines are not guaranteed to work), be sure | 
|---|
| 2135 | to say so. | 
|---|
| 2136 |  | 
|---|
| 2137 | Also explain the significance of the return value, if there is one. | 
|---|
| 2138 |  | 
|---|
| 2139 | Please put two spaces after the end of a sentence in your comments, | 
|---|
| 2140 | so that the Emacs sentence commands will work.  Also, please write | 
|---|
| 2141 | complete sentences and capitalize the first word.  If a lower-case | 
|---|
| 2142 | identifier comes at the beginning of a sentence, don't capitalize it! | 
|---|
| 2143 | Changing the spelling makes it a different identifier.  If you don't | 
|---|
| 2144 | like starting a sentence with a lower case letter, write the sentence | 
|---|
| 2145 | differently (e.g., "The identifier lower-case is ..."). | 
|---|
| 2146 |  | 
|---|
| 2147 | The comment on a function is much clearer if you use the argument | 
|---|
| 2148 | names to speak about the argument values.  The variable name itself | 
|---|
| 2149 | should be lower case, but write it in upper case when you are speaking | 
|---|
| 2150 | about the value rather than the variable itself.  Thus, "the inode | 
|---|
| 2151 | number NODE_NUM" rather than "an inode". | 
|---|
| 2152 |  | 
|---|
| 2153 | There is usually no purpose in restating the name of the function in | 
|---|
| 2154 | the comment before it, because the reader can see that for himself. | 
|---|
| 2155 | There might be an exception when the comment is so long that the | 
|---|
| 2156 | function itself would be off the bottom of the screen. | 
|---|
| 2157 |  | 
|---|
| 2158 | There should be a comment on each static variable as well, like this: | 
|---|
| 2159 |  | 
|---|
| 2160 | /* Nonzero means truncate lines in the display; | 
|---|
| 2161 | zero means continue them.  */ | 
|---|
| 2162 | int truncate_lines; | 
|---|
| 2163 |  | 
|---|
| 2164 | Every `#endif' should have a comment, except in the case of short | 
|---|
| 2165 | conditionals (just a few lines) that are not nested.  The comment should | 
|---|
| 2166 | state the condition of the conditional that is ending, _including its | 
|---|
| 2167 | sense_.  `#else' should have a comment describing the condition _and | 
|---|
| 2168 | sense_ of the code that follows.  For example: | 
|---|
| 2169 |  | 
|---|
| 2170 | #ifdef foo | 
|---|
| 2171 | ... | 
|---|
| 2172 | #else /* not foo */ | 
|---|
| 2173 | ... | 
|---|
| 2174 | #endif /* not foo */ | 
|---|
| 2175 | #ifdef foo | 
|---|
| 2176 | ... | 
|---|
| 2177 | #endif /* foo */ | 
|---|
| 2178 |  | 
|---|
| 2179 | but, by contrast, write the comments this way for a `#ifndef': | 
|---|
| 2180 |  | 
|---|
| 2181 | #ifndef foo | 
|---|
| 2182 | ... | 
|---|
| 2183 | #else /* foo */ | 
|---|
| 2184 | ... | 
|---|
| 2185 | #endif /* foo */ | 
|---|
| 2186 | #ifndef foo | 
|---|
| 2187 | ... | 
|---|
| 2188 | #endif /* not foo */ | 
|---|
| 2189 |  | 
|---|
| 2190 |  | 
|---|
| 2191 | File: standards.info,  Node: Syntactic Conventions,  Next: Names,  Prev: Comments,  Up: Writing C | 
|---|
| 2192 |  | 
|---|
| 2193 | Clean Use of C Constructs | 
|---|
| 2194 | ========================= | 
|---|
| 2195 |  | 
|---|
| 2196 | Please explicitly declare the types of all objects.  For example, you | 
|---|
| 2197 | should explicitly declare all arguments to functions, and you should | 
|---|
| 2198 | declare functions to return `int' rather than omitting the `int'. | 
|---|
| 2199 |  | 
|---|
| 2200 | Some programmers like to use the GCC `-Wall' option, and change the | 
|---|
| 2201 | code whenever it issues a warning.  If you want to do this, then do. | 
|---|
| 2202 | Other programmers prefer not to use `-Wall', because it gives warnings | 
|---|
| 2203 | for valid and legitimate code which they do not want to change.  If you | 
|---|
| 2204 | want to do this, then do.  The compiler should be your servant, not | 
|---|
| 2205 | your master. | 
|---|
| 2206 |  | 
|---|
| 2207 | Declarations of external functions and functions to appear later in | 
|---|
| 2208 | the source file should all go in one place near the beginning of the | 
|---|
| 2209 | file (somewhere before the first function definition in the file), or | 
|---|
| 2210 | else should go in a header file.  Don't put `extern' declarations inside | 
|---|
| 2211 | functions. | 
|---|
| 2212 |  | 
|---|
| 2213 | It used to be common practice to use the same local variables (with | 
|---|
| 2214 | names like `tem') over and over for different values within one | 
|---|
| 2215 | function.  Instead of doing this, it is better declare a separate local | 
|---|
| 2216 | variable for each distinct purpose, and give it a name which is | 
|---|
| 2217 | meaningful.  This not only makes programs easier to understand, it also | 
|---|
| 2218 | facilitates optimization by good compilers.  You can also move the | 
|---|
| 2219 | declaration of each local variable into the smallest scope that includes | 
|---|
| 2220 | all its uses.  This makes the program even cleaner. | 
|---|
| 2221 |  | 
|---|
| 2222 | Don't use local variables or parameters that shadow global | 
|---|
| 2223 | identifiers. | 
|---|
| 2224 |  | 
|---|
| 2225 | Don't declare multiple variables in one declaration that spans lines. | 
|---|
| 2226 | Start a new declaration on each line, instead.  For example, instead of | 
|---|
| 2227 | this: | 
|---|
| 2228 |  | 
|---|
| 2229 | int    foo, | 
|---|
| 2230 | bar; | 
|---|
| 2231 |  | 
|---|
| 2232 | write either this: | 
|---|
| 2233 |  | 
|---|
| 2234 | int foo, bar; | 
|---|
| 2235 |  | 
|---|
| 2236 | or this: | 
|---|
| 2237 |  | 
|---|
| 2238 | int foo; | 
|---|
| 2239 | int bar; | 
|---|
| 2240 |  | 
|---|
| 2241 | (If they are global variables, each should have a comment preceding it | 
|---|
| 2242 | anyway.) | 
|---|
| 2243 |  | 
|---|
| 2244 | When you have an `if'-`else' statement nested in another `if' | 
|---|
| 2245 | statement, always put braces around the `if'-`else'.  Thus, never write | 
|---|
| 2246 | like this: | 
|---|
| 2247 |  | 
|---|
| 2248 | if (foo) | 
|---|
| 2249 | if (bar) | 
|---|
| 2250 | win (); | 
|---|
| 2251 | else | 
|---|
| 2252 | lose (); | 
|---|
| 2253 |  | 
|---|
| 2254 | always like this: | 
|---|
| 2255 |  | 
|---|
| 2256 | if (foo) | 
|---|
| 2257 | { | 
|---|
| 2258 | if (bar) | 
|---|
| 2259 | win (); | 
|---|
| 2260 | else | 
|---|
| 2261 | lose (); | 
|---|
| 2262 | } | 
|---|
| 2263 |  | 
|---|
| 2264 | If you have an `if' statement nested inside of an `else' statement, | 
|---|
| 2265 | either write `else if' on one line, like this, | 
|---|
| 2266 |  | 
|---|
| 2267 | if (foo) | 
|---|
| 2268 | ... | 
|---|
| 2269 | else if (bar) | 
|---|
| 2270 | ... | 
|---|
| 2271 |  | 
|---|
| 2272 | with its `then'-part indented like the preceding `then'-part, or write | 
|---|
| 2273 | the nested `if' within braces like this: | 
|---|
| 2274 |  | 
|---|
| 2275 | if (foo) | 
|---|
| 2276 | ... | 
|---|
| 2277 | else | 
|---|
| 2278 | { | 
|---|
| 2279 | if (bar) | 
|---|
| 2280 | ... | 
|---|
| 2281 | } | 
|---|
| 2282 |  | 
|---|
| 2283 | Don't declare both a structure tag and variables or typedefs in the | 
|---|
| 2284 | same declaration.  Instead, declare the structure tag separately and | 
|---|
| 2285 | then use it to declare the variables or typedefs. | 
|---|
| 2286 |  | 
|---|
| 2287 | Try to avoid assignments inside `if'-conditions.  For example, don't | 
|---|
| 2288 | write this: | 
|---|
| 2289 |  | 
|---|
| 2290 | if ((foo = (char *) malloc (sizeof *foo)) == 0) | 
|---|
| 2291 | fatal ("virtual memory exhausted"); | 
|---|
| 2292 |  | 
|---|
| 2293 | instead, write this: | 
|---|
| 2294 |  | 
|---|
| 2295 | foo = (char *) malloc (sizeof *foo); | 
|---|
| 2296 | if (foo == 0) | 
|---|
| 2297 | fatal ("virtual memory exhausted"); | 
|---|
| 2298 |  | 
|---|
| 2299 | Don't make the program ugly to placate `lint'.  Please don't insert | 
|---|
| 2300 | any casts to `void'.  Zero without a cast is perfectly fine as a null | 
|---|
| 2301 | pointer constant, except when calling a varargs function. | 
|---|
| 2302 |  | 
|---|
| 2303 |  | 
|---|
| 2304 | File: standards.info,  Node: Names,  Next: System Portability,  Prev: Syntactic Conventions,  Up: Writing C | 
|---|
| 2305 |  | 
|---|
| 2306 | Naming Variables, Functions, and Files | 
|---|
| 2307 | ====================================== | 
|---|
| 2308 |  | 
|---|
| 2309 | The names of global variables and functions in a program serve as | 
|---|
| 2310 | comments of a sort.  So don't choose terse names--instead, look for | 
|---|
| 2311 | names that give useful information about the meaning of the variable or | 
|---|
| 2312 | function.  In a GNU program, names should be English, like other | 
|---|
| 2313 | comments. | 
|---|
| 2314 |  | 
|---|
| 2315 | Local variable names can be shorter, because they are used only | 
|---|
| 2316 | within one context, where (presumably) comments explain their purpose. | 
|---|
| 2317 |  | 
|---|
| 2318 | Try to limit your use of abbreviations in symbol names.  It is ok to | 
|---|
| 2319 | make a few abbreviations, explain what they mean, and then use them | 
|---|
| 2320 | frequently, but don't use lots of obscure abbreviations. | 
|---|
| 2321 |  | 
|---|
| 2322 | Please use underscores to separate words in a name, so that the Emacs | 
|---|
| 2323 | word commands can be useful within them.  Stick to lower case; reserve | 
|---|
| 2324 | upper case for macros and `enum' constants, and for name-prefixes that | 
|---|
| 2325 | follow a uniform convention. | 
|---|
| 2326 |  | 
|---|
| 2327 | For example, you should use names like `ignore_space_change_flag'; | 
|---|
| 2328 | don't use names like `iCantReadThis'. | 
|---|
| 2329 |  | 
|---|
| 2330 | Variables that indicate whether command-line options have been | 
|---|
| 2331 | specified should be named after the meaning of the option, not after | 
|---|
| 2332 | the option-letter.  A comment should state both the exact meaning of | 
|---|
| 2333 | the option and its letter.  For example, | 
|---|
| 2334 |  | 
|---|
| 2335 | /* Ignore changes in horizontal whitespace (-b).  */ | 
|---|
| 2336 | int ignore_space_change_flag; | 
|---|
| 2337 |  | 
|---|
| 2338 | When you want to define names with constant integer values, use | 
|---|
| 2339 | `enum' rather than `#define'.  GDB knows about enumeration constants. | 
|---|
| 2340 |  | 
|---|
| 2341 | You might want to make sure that none of the file names would | 
|---|
| 2342 | conflict the files were loaded onto an MS-DOS file system which | 
|---|
| 2343 | shortens the names.  You can use the program `doschk' to test for this. | 
|---|
| 2344 |  | 
|---|
| 2345 | Some GNU programs were designed to limit themselves to file names of | 
|---|
| 2346 | 14 characters or less, to avoid file name conflicts if they are read | 
|---|
| 2347 | into older System V systems.  Please preserve this feature in the | 
|---|
| 2348 | existing GNU programs that have it, but there is no need to do this in | 
|---|
| 2349 | new GNU programs.  `doschk' also reports file names longer than 14 | 
|---|
| 2350 | characters. | 
|---|
| 2351 |  | 
|---|
| 2352 |  | 
|---|
| 2353 | File: standards.info,  Node: System Portability,  Next: CPU Portability,  Prev: Names,  Up: Writing C | 
|---|
| 2354 |  | 
|---|
| 2355 | Portability between System Types | 
|---|
| 2356 | ================================ | 
|---|
| 2357 |  | 
|---|
| 2358 | In the Unix world, "portability" refers to porting to different Unix | 
|---|
| 2359 | versions.  For a GNU program, this kind of portability is desirable, but | 
|---|
| 2360 | not paramount. | 
|---|
| 2361 |  | 
|---|
| 2362 | The primary purpose of GNU software is to run on top of the GNU | 
|---|
| 2363 | kernel, compiled with the GNU C compiler, on various types of CPU.  So | 
|---|
| 2364 | the kinds of portability that are absolutely necessary are quite | 
|---|
| 2365 | limited.  But it is important to support Linux-based GNU systems, since | 
|---|
| 2366 | they are the form of GNU that is popular. | 
|---|
| 2367 |  | 
|---|
| 2368 | Beyond that, it is good to support the other free operating systems | 
|---|
| 2369 | (*BSD), and it is nice to support other Unix-like systems if you want | 
|---|
| 2370 | to.  Supporting a variety of Unix-like systems is desirable, although | 
|---|
| 2371 | not paramount.  It is usually not too hard, so you may as well do it. | 
|---|
| 2372 | But you don't have to consider it an obligation, if it does turn out to | 
|---|
| 2373 | be hard. | 
|---|
| 2374 |  | 
|---|
| 2375 | The easiest way to achieve portability to most Unix-like systems is | 
|---|
| 2376 | to use Autoconf.  It's unlikely that your program needs to know more | 
|---|
| 2377 | information about the host platform than Autoconf can provide, simply | 
|---|
| 2378 | because most of the programs that need such knowledge have already been | 
|---|
| 2379 | written. | 
|---|
| 2380 |  | 
|---|
| 2381 | Avoid using the format of semi-internal data bases (e.g., | 
|---|
| 2382 | directories) when there is a higher-level alternative (`readdir'). | 
|---|
| 2383 |  | 
|---|
| 2384 | As for systems that are not like Unix, such as MSDOS, Windows, the | 
|---|
| 2385 | Macintosh, VMS, and MVS, supporting them is often a lot of work.  When | 
|---|
| 2386 | that is the case, it is better to spend your time adding features that | 
|---|
| 2387 | will be useful on GNU and GNU/Linux, rather than on supporting other | 
|---|
| 2388 | incompatible systems. | 
|---|
| 2389 |  | 
|---|
| 2390 | It is a good idea to define the "feature test macro" `_GNU_SOURCE' | 
|---|
| 2391 | when compiling your C files.  When you compile on GNU or GNU/Linux, | 
|---|
| 2392 | this will enable the declarations of GNU library extension functions, | 
|---|
| 2393 | and that will usually give you a compiler error message if you define | 
|---|
| 2394 | the same function names in some other way in your program.  (You don't | 
|---|
| 2395 | have to actually _use_ these functions, if you prefer to make the | 
|---|
| 2396 | program more portable to other systems.) | 
|---|
| 2397 |  | 
|---|
| 2398 | But whether or not you use these GNU extensions, you should avoid | 
|---|
| 2399 | using their names for any other meanings.  Doing so would make it hard | 
|---|
| 2400 | to move your code into other GNU programs. | 
|---|
| 2401 |  | 
|---|
| 2402 |  | 
|---|
| 2403 | File: standards.info,  Node: CPU Portability,  Next: System Functions,  Prev: System Portability,  Up: Writing C | 
|---|
| 2404 |  | 
|---|
| 2405 | Portability between CPUs | 
|---|
| 2406 | ======================== | 
|---|
| 2407 |  | 
|---|
| 2408 | Even GNU systems will differ because of differences among CPU | 
|---|
| 2409 | types--for example, difference in byte ordering and alignment | 
|---|
| 2410 | requirements.  It is absolutely essential to handle these differences. | 
|---|
| 2411 | However, don't make any effort to cater to the possibility that an | 
|---|
| 2412 | `int' will be less than 32 bits.  We don't support 16-bit machines in | 
|---|
| 2413 | GNU. | 
|---|
| 2414 |  | 
|---|
| 2415 | Similarly, don't make any effort to cater to the possibility that | 
|---|
| 2416 | `long' will be smaller than predefined types like `size_t'.  For | 
|---|
| 2417 | example, the following code is ok: | 
|---|
| 2418 |  | 
|---|
| 2419 | printf ("size = %lu\n", (unsigned long) sizeof array); | 
|---|
| 2420 | printf ("diff = %ld\n", (long) (pointer2 - pointer1)); | 
|---|
| 2421 |  | 
|---|
| 2422 | 1989 Standard C requires this to work, and we know of only one | 
|---|
| 2423 | counterexample: 64-bit programs on Microsoft Windows IA-64.  We will | 
|---|
| 2424 | leave it to those who want to port GNU programs to that environment to | 
|---|
| 2425 | figure out how to do it. | 
|---|
| 2426 |  | 
|---|
| 2427 | Predefined file-size types like `off_t' are an exception: they are | 
|---|
| 2428 | longer than `long' on many platforms, so code like the above won't work | 
|---|
| 2429 | with them.  One way to print an `off_t' value portably is to print its | 
|---|
| 2430 | digits yourself, one by one. | 
|---|
| 2431 |  | 
|---|
| 2432 | Don't assume that the address of an `int' object is also the address | 
|---|
| 2433 | of its least-significant byte.  This is false on big-endian machines. | 
|---|
| 2434 | Thus, don't make the following mistake: | 
|---|
| 2435 |  | 
|---|
| 2436 | int c; | 
|---|
| 2437 | ... | 
|---|
| 2438 | while ((c = getchar()) != EOF) | 
|---|
| 2439 | write(file_descriptor, &c, 1); | 
|---|
| 2440 |  | 
|---|
| 2441 | When calling functions, you need not worry about the difference | 
|---|
| 2442 | between pointers of various types, or between pointers and integers. | 
|---|
| 2443 | On most machines, there's no difference anyway.  As for the few | 
|---|
| 2444 | machines where there is a difference, all of them support Standard C | 
|---|
| 2445 | prototypes, so you can use prototypes (perhaps conditionalized to be | 
|---|
| 2446 | active only in Standard C) to make the code work on those systems. | 
|---|
| 2447 |  | 
|---|
| 2448 | In certain cases, it is ok to pass integer and pointer arguments | 
|---|
| 2449 | indiscriminately to the same function, and use no prototype on any | 
|---|
| 2450 | system.  For example, many GNU programs have error-reporting functions | 
|---|
| 2451 | that pass their arguments along to `printf' and friends: | 
|---|
| 2452 |  | 
|---|
| 2453 | error (s, a1, a2, a3) | 
|---|
| 2454 | char *s; | 
|---|
| 2455 | char *a1, *a2, *a3; | 
|---|
| 2456 | { | 
|---|
| 2457 | fprintf (stderr, "error: "); | 
|---|
| 2458 | fprintf (stderr, s, a1, a2, a3); | 
|---|
| 2459 | } | 
|---|
| 2460 |  | 
|---|
| 2461 | In practice, this works on all machines, since a pointer is generally | 
|---|
| 2462 | the widest possible kind of argument; it is much simpler than any | 
|---|
| 2463 | "correct" alternative.  Be sure _not_ to use a prototype for such | 
|---|
| 2464 | functions. | 
|---|
| 2465 |  | 
|---|
| 2466 | If you have decided to use Standard C, then you can instead define | 
|---|
| 2467 | `error' using `stdarg.h', and pass the arguments along to `vfprintf'. | 
|---|
| 2468 |  | 
|---|
| 2469 | Avoid casting pointers to integers if you can.  Such casts greatly | 
|---|
| 2470 | reduce portability, and in most programs they are easy to avoid.  In the | 
|---|
| 2471 | cases where casting pointers to integers is essential--such as, a Lisp | 
|---|
| 2472 | interpreter which stores type information as well as an address in one | 
|---|
| 2473 | word--you'll have to make explicit provisions to handle different word | 
|---|
| 2474 | sizes.  You will also need to make provision for systems in which the | 
|---|
| 2475 | normal range of addresses you can get from `malloc' starts far away | 
|---|
| 2476 | from zero. | 
|---|
| 2477 |  | 
|---|
| 2478 |  | 
|---|
| 2479 | File: standards.info,  Node: System Functions,  Next: Internationalization,  Prev: CPU Portability,  Up: Writing C | 
|---|
| 2480 |  | 
|---|
| 2481 | Calling System Functions | 
|---|
| 2482 | ======================== | 
|---|
| 2483 |  | 
|---|
| 2484 | C implementations differ substantially.  Standard C reduces but does | 
|---|
| 2485 | not eliminate the incompatibilities; meanwhile, many GNU packages still | 
|---|
| 2486 | support pre-standard compilers because this is not hard to do.  This | 
|---|
| 2487 | chapter gives recommendations for how to use the more-or-less standard C | 
|---|
| 2488 | library functions to avoid unnecessary loss of portability. | 
|---|
| 2489 |  | 
|---|
| 2490 | * Don't use the return value of `sprintf'.  It returns the number of | 
|---|
| 2491 | characters written on some systems, but not on all systems. | 
|---|
| 2492 |  | 
|---|
| 2493 | * Be aware that `vfprintf' is not always available. | 
|---|
| 2494 |  | 
|---|
| 2495 | * `main' should be declared to return type `int'.  It should | 
|---|
| 2496 | terminate either by calling `exit' or by returning the integer | 
|---|
| 2497 | status code; make sure it cannot ever return an undefined value. | 
|---|
| 2498 |  | 
|---|
| 2499 | * Don't declare system functions explicitly. | 
|---|
| 2500 |  | 
|---|
| 2501 | Almost any declaration for a system function is wrong on some | 
|---|
| 2502 | system.  To minimize conflicts, leave it to the system header | 
|---|
| 2503 | files to declare system functions.  If the headers don't declare a | 
|---|
| 2504 | function, let it remain undeclared. | 
|---|
| 2505 |  | 
|---|
| 2506 | While it may seem unclean to use a function without declaring it, | 
|---|
| 2507 | in practice this works fine for most system library functions on | 
|---|
| 2508 | the systems where this really happens; thus, the disadvantage is | 
|---|
| 2509 | only theoretical.  By contrast, actual declarations have | 
|---|
| 2510 | frequently caused actual conflicts. | 
|---|
| 2511 |  | 
|---|
| 2512 | * If you must declare a system function, don't specify the argument | 
|---|
| 2513 | types.  Use an old-style declaration, not a Standard C prototype. | 
|---|
| 2514 | The more you specify about the function, the more likely a | 
|---|
| 2515 | conflict. | 
|---|
| 2516 |  | 
|---|
| 2517 | * In particular, don't unconditionally declare `malloc' or `realloc'. | 
|---|
| 2518 |  | 
|---|
| 2519 | Most GNU programs use those functions just once, in functions | 
|---|
| 2520 | conventionally named `xmalloc' and `xrealloc'.  These functions | 
|---|
| 2521 | call `malloc' and `realloc', respectively, and check the results. | 
|---|
| 2522 |  | 
|---|
| 2523 | Because `xmalloc' and `xrealloc' are defined in your program, you | 
|---|
| 2524 | can declare them in other files without any risk of type conflict. | 
|---|
| 2525 |  | 
|---|
| 2526 | On most systems, `int' is the same length as a pointer; thus, the | 
|---|
| 2527 | calls to `malloc' and `realloc' work fine.  For the few | 
|---|
| 2528 | exceptional systems (mostly 64-bit machines), you can use | 
|---|
| 2529 | *conditionalized* declarations of `malloc' and `realloc'--or put | 
|---|
| 2530 | these declarations in configuration files specific to those | 
|---|
| 2531 | systems. | 
|---|
| 2532 |  | 
|---|
| 2533 | * The string functions require special treatment.  Some Unix systems | 
|---|
| 2534 | have a header file `string.h'; others have `strings.h'.  Neither | 
|---|
| 2535 | file name is portable.  There are two things you can do: use | 
|---|
| 2536 | Autoconf to figure out which file to include, or don't include | 
|---|
| 2537 | either file. | 
|---|
| 2538 |  | 
|---|
| 2539 | * If you don't include either strings file, you can't get | 
|---|
| 2540 | declarations for the string functions from the header file in the | 
|---|
| 2541 | usual way. | 
|---|
| 2542 |  | 
|---|
| 2543 | That causes less of a problem than you might think.  The newer | 
|---|
| 2544 | standard string functions should be avoided anyway because many | 
|---|
| 2545 | systems still don't support them.  The string functions you can | 
|---|
| 2546 | use are these: | 
|---|
| 2547 |  | 
|---|
| 2548 | strcpy   strncpy   strcat   strncat | 
|---|
| 2549 | strlen   strcmp    strncmp | 
|---|
| 2550 | strchr   strrchr | 
|---|
| 2551 |  | 
|---|
| 2552 | The copy and concatenate functions work fine without a declaration | 
|---|
| 2553 | as long as you don't use their values.  Using their values without | 
|---|
| 2554 | a declaration fails on systems where the width of a pointer | 
|---|
| 2555 | differs from the width of `int', and perhaps in other cases.  It | 
|---|
| 2556 | is trivial to avoid using their values, so do that. | 
|---|
| 2557 |  | 
|---|
| 2558 | The compare functions and `strlen' work fine without a declaration | 
|---|
| 2559 | on most systems, possibly all the ones that GNU software runs on. | 
|---|
| 2560 | You may find it necessary to declare them *conditionally* on a few | 
|---|
| 2561 | systems. | 
|---|
| 2562 |  | 
|---|
| 2563 | The search functions must be declared to return `char *'.  Luckily, | 
|---|
| 2564 | there is no variation in the data type they return.  But there is | 
|---|
| 2565 | variation in their names.  Some systems give these functions the | 
|---|
| 2566 | names `index' and `rindex'; other systems use the names `strchr' | 
|---|
| 2567 | and `strrchr'.  Some systems support both pairs of names, but | 
|---|
| 2568 | neither pair works on all systems. | 
|---|
| 2569 |  | 
|---|
| 2570 | You should pick a single pair of names and use it throughout your | 
|---|
| 2571 | program.  (Nowadays, it is better to choose `strchr' and `strrchr' | 
|---|
| 2572 | for new programs, since those are the standard names.)  Declare | 
|---|
| 2573 | both of those names as functions returning `char *'.  On systems | 
|---|
| 2574 | which don't support those names, define them as macros in terms of | 
|---|
| 2575 | the other pair.  For example, here is what to put at the beginning | 
|---|
| 2576 | of your file (or in a header) if you want to use the names | 
|---|
| 2577 | `strchr' and `strrchr' throughout: | 
|---|
| 2578 |  | 
|---|
| 2579 | #ifndef HAVE_STRCHR | 
|---|
| 2580 | #define strchr index | 
|---|
| 2581 | #endif | 
|---|
| 2582 | #ifndef HAVE_STRRCHR | 
|---|
| 2583 | #define strrchr rindex | 
|---|
| 2584 | #endif | 
|---|
| 2585 |  | 
|---|
| 2586 | char *strchr (); | 
|---|
| 2587 | char *strrchr (); | 
|---|
| 2588 |  | 
|---|
| 2589 | Here we assume that `HAVE_STRCHR' and `HAVE_STRRCHR' are macros | 
|---|
| 2590 | defined in systems where the corresponding functions exist.  One way to | 
|---|
| 2591 | get them properly defined is to use Autoconf. | 
|---|
| 2592 |  | 
|---|
| 2593 |  | 
|---|
| 2594 | File: standards.info,  Node: Internationalization,  Next: Mmap,  Prev: System Functions,  Up: Writing C | 
|---|
| 2595 |  | 
|---|
| 2596 | Internationalization | 
|---|
| 2597 | ==================== | 
|---|
| 2598 |  | 
|---|
| 2599 | GNU has a library called GNU gettext that makes it easy to translate | 
|---|
| 2600 | the messages in a program into various languages.  You should use this | 
|---|
| 2601 | library in every program.  Use English for the messages as they appear | 
|---|
| 2602 | in the program, and let gettext provide the way to translate them into | 
|---|
| 2603 | other languages. | 
|---|
| 2604 |  | 
|---|
| 2605 | Using GNU gettext involves putting a call to the `gettext' macro | 
|---|
| 2606 | around each string that might need translation--like this: | 
|---|
| 2607 |  | 
|---|
| 2608 | printf (gettext ("Processing file `%s'...")); | 
|---|
| 2609 |  | 
|---|
| 2610 | This permits GNU gettext to replace the string `"Processing file | 
|---|
| 2611 | `%s'..."' with a translated version. | 
|---|
| 2612 |  | 
|---|
| 2613 | Once a program uses gettext, please make a point of writing calls to | 
|---|
| 2614 | `gettext' when you add new strings that call for translation. | 
|---|
| 2615 |  | 
|---|
| 2616 | Using GNU gettext in a package involves specifying a "text domain | 
|---|
| 2617 | name" for the package.  The text domain name is used to separate the | 
|---|
| 2618 | translations for this package from the translations for other packages. | 
|---|
| 2619 | Normally, the text domain name should be the same as the name of the | 
|---|
| 2620 | package--for example, `fileutils' for the GNU file utilities. | 
|---|
| 2621 |  | 
|---|
| 2622 | To enable gettext to work well, avoid writing code that makes | 
|---|
| 2623 | assumptions about the structure of words or sentences.  When you want | 
|---|
| 2624 | the precise text of a sentence to vary depending on the data, use two or | 
|---|
| 2625 | more alternative string constants each containing a complete sentences, | 
|---|
| 2626 | rather than inserting conditionalized words or phrases into a single | 
|---|
| 2627 | sentence framework. | 
|---|
| 2628 |  | 
|---|
| 2629 | Here is an example of what not to do: | 
|---|
| 2630 |  | 
|---|
| 2631 | printf ("%d file%s processed", nfiles, | 
|---|
| 2632 | nfiles != 1 ? "s" : ""); | 
|---|
| 2633 |  | 
|---|
| 2634 | The problem with that example is that it assumes that plurals are made | 
|---|
| 2635 | by adding `s'.  If you apply gettext to the format string, like this, | 
|---|
| 2636 |  | 
|---|
| 2637 | printf (gettext ("%d file%s processed"), nfiles, | 
|---|
| 2638 | nfiles != 1 ? "s" : ""); | 
|---|
| 2639 |  | 
|---|
| 2640 | the message can use different words, but it will still be forced to use | 
|---|
| 2641 | `s' for the plural.  Here is a better way: | 
|---|
| 2642 |  | 
|---|
| 2643 | printf ((nfiles != 1 ? "%d files processed" | 
|---|
| 2644 | : "%d file processed"), | 
|---|
| 2645 | nfiles); | 
|---|
| 2646 |  | 
|---|
| 2647 | This way, you can apply gettext to each of the two strings | 
|---|
| 2648 | independently: | 
|---|
| 2649 |  | 
|---|
| 2650 | printf ((nfiles != 1 ? gettext ("%d files processed") | 
|---|
| 2651 | : gettext ("%d file processed")), | 
|---|
| 2652 | nfiles); | 
|---|
| 2653 |  | 
|---|
| 2654 | This can be any method of forming the plural of the word for "file", and | 
|---|
| 2655 | also handles languages that require agreement in the word for | 
|---|
| 2656 | "processed". | 
|---|
| 2657 |  | 
|---|
| 2658 | A similar problem appears at the level of sentence structure with | 
|---|
| 2659 | this code: | 
|---|
| 2660 |  | 
|---|
| 2661 | printf ("#  Implicit rule search has%s been done.\n", | 
|---|
| 2662 | f->tried_implicit ? "" : " not"); | 
|---|
| 2663 |  | 
|---|
| 2664 | Adding `gettext' calls to this code cannot give correct results for all | 
|---|
| 2665 | languages, because negation in some languages requires adding words at | 
|---|
| 2666 | more than one place in the sentence.  By contrast, adding `gettext' | 
|---|
| 2667 | calls does the job straightfowardly if the code starts out like this: | 
|---|
| 2668 |  | 
|---|
| 2669 | printf (f->tried_implicit | 
|---|
| 2670 | ? "#  Implicit rule search has been done.\n", | 
|---|
| 2671 | : "#  Implicit rule search has not been done.\n"); | 
|---|
| 2672 |  | 
|---|
| 2673 |  | 
|---|
| 2674 | File: standards.info,  Node: Mmap,  Prev: Internationalization,  Up: Writing C | 
|---|
| 2675 |  | 
|---|
| 2676 | Mmap | 
|---|
| 2677 | ==== | 
|---|
| 2678 |  | 
|---|
| 2679 | Don't assume that `mmap' either works on all files or fails for all | 
|---|
| 2680 | files.  It may work on some files and fail on others. | 
|---|
| 2681 |  | 
|---|
| 2682 | The proper way to use `mmap' is to try it on the specific file for | 
|---|
| 2683 | which you want to use it--and if `mmap' doesn't work, fall back on | 
|---|
| 2684 | doing the job in another way using `read' and `write'. | 
|---|
| 2685 |  | 
|---|
| 2686 | The reason this precaution is needed is that the GNU kernel (the | 
|---|
| 2687 | HURD) provides a user-extensible file system, in which there can be many | 
|---|
| 2688 | different kinds of "ordinary files."  Many of them support `mmap', but | 
|---|
| 2689 | some do not.  It is important to make programs handle all these kinds | 
|---|
| 2690 | of files. | 
|---|
| 2691 |  | 
|---|
| 2692 |  | 
|---|
| 2693 | File: standards.info,  Node: Documentation,  Next: Managing Releases,  Prev: Writing C,  Up: Top | 
|---|
| 2694 |  | 
|---|
| 2695 | Documenting Programs | 
|---|
| 2696 | ******************** | 
|---|
| 2697 |  | 
|---|
| 2698 | A GNU program should ideally come with full free documentation, | 
|---|
| 2699 | adequate for both reference and tutorial purposes.  If the package can | 
|---|
| 2700 | be programmed or extended, the documentation should cover programming or | 
|---|
| 2701 | extending it, as well as just using it. | 
|---|
| 2702 |  | 
|---|
| 2703 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 2704 |  | 
|---|
| 2705 | * GNU Manuals::                 Writing proper manuals. | 
|---|
| 2706 | * Doc Strings and Manuals::     Compiling doc strings doesn't make a manual. | 
|---|
| 2707 | * Manual Structure Details::    Specific structure conventions. | 
|---|
| 2708 | * License for Manuals::         Writing the distribution terms for a manual. | 
|---|
| 2709 | * Manual Credits::              Giving credit to documentation contributors. | 
|---|
| 2710 | * Printed Manuals::             Mentioning the printed manual. | 
|---|
| 2711 | * NEWS File::                   NEWS files supplement manuals. | 
|---|
| 2712 | * Change Logs::                 Recording Changes | 
|---|
| 2713 | * Man Pages::                   Man pages are secondary. | 
|---|
| 2714 | * Reading other Manuals::       How far you can go in learning | 
|---|
| 2715 | from other manuals. | 
|---|
| 2716 |  | 
|---|
| 2717 |  | 
|---|
| 2718 | File: standards.info,  Node: GNU Manuals,  Next: Doc Strings and Manuals,  Up: Documentation | 
|---|
| 2719 |  | 
|---|
| 2720 | GNU Manuals | 
|---|
| 2721 | =========== | 
|---|
| 2722 |  | 
|---|
| 2723 | The preferred document format for the GNU system is the Texinfo | 
|---|
| 2724 | formatting language.  Every GNU package should (ideally) have | 
|---|
| 2725 | documentation in Texinfo both for reference and for learners.  Texinfo | 
|---|
| 2726 | makes it possible to produce a good quality formatted book, using TeX, | 
|---|
| 2727 | and to generate an Info file.  It is also possible to generate HTML | 
|---|
| 2728 | output from Texinfo source.  See the Texinfo manual, either the | 
|---|
| 2729 | hardcopy, or the on-line version available through `info' or the Emacs | 
|---|
| 2730 | Info subsystem (`C-h i'). | 
|---|
| 2731 |  | 
|---|
| 2732 | Nowadays some other formats such as Docbook and Sgmltexi can be | 
|---|
| 2733 | converted automatically into Texinfo.  It is ok to produce the Texinfo | 
|---|
| 2734 | documentation by conversion this way, as long as it gives good results. | 
|---|
| 2735 |  | 
|---|
| 2736 | Programmers often find it most natural to structure the documentation | 
|---|
| 2737 | following the structure of the implementation, which they know.  But | 
|---|
| 2738 | this structure is not necessarily good for explaining how to use the | 
|---|
| 2739 | program; it may be irrelevant and confusing for a user. | 
|---|
| 2740 |  | 
|---|
| 2741 | At every level, from the sentences in a paragraph to the grouping of | 
|---|
| 2742 | topics into separate manuals, the right way to structure documentation | 
|---|
| 2743 | is according to the concepts and questions that a user will have in mind | 
|---|
| 2744 | when reading it.  Sometimes this structure of ideas matches the | 
|---|
| 2745 | structure of the implementation of the software being documented--but | 
|---|
| 2746 | often they are different.  Often the most important part of learning to | 
|---|
| 2747 | write good documentation is learning to notice when you are structuring | 
|---|
| 2748 | the documentation like the implementation, and think about better | 
|---|
| 2749 | alternatives. | 
|---|
| 2750 |  | 
|---|
| 2751 | For example, each program in the GNU system probably ought to be | 
|---|
| 2752 | documented in one manual; but this does not mean each program should | 
|---|
| 2753 | have its own manual.  That would be following the structure of the | 
|---|
| 2754 | implementation, rather than the structure that helps the user | 
|---|
| 2755 | understand. | 
|---|
| 2756 |  | 
|---|
| 2757 | Instead, each manual should cover a coherent _topic_.  For example, | 
|---|
| 2758 | instead of a manual for `diff' and a manual for `diff3', we have one | 
|---|
| 2759 | manual for "comparison of files" which covers both of those programs, | 
|---|
| 2760 | as well as `cmp'.  By documenting these programs together, we can make | 
|---|
| 2761 | the whole subject clearer. | 
|---|
| 2762 |  | 
|---|
| 2763 | The manual which discusses a program should certainly document all of | 
|---|
| 2764 | the program's command-line options and all of its commands.  It should | 
|---|
| 2765 | give examples of their use.  But don't organize the manual as a list of | 
|---|
| 2766 | features.  Instead, organize it logically, by subtopics.  Address the | 
|---|
| 2767 | questions that a user will ask when thinking about the job that the | 
|---|
| 2768 | program does. | 
|---|
| 2769 |  | 
|---|
| 2770 | In general, a GNU manual should serve both as tutorial and reference. | 
|---|
| 2771 | It should be set up for convenient access to each topic through Info, | 
|---|
| 2772 | and for reading straight through (appendixes aside).  A GNU manual | 
|---|
| 2773 | should give a good introduction to a beginner reading through from the | 
|---|
| 2774 | start, and should also provide all the details that hackers want.  The | 
|---|
| 2775 | Bison manual is a good example of this--please take a look at it to see | 
|---|
| 2776 | what we mean. | 
|---|
| 2777 |  | 
|---|
| 2778 | That is not as hard as it first sounds.  Arrange each chapter as a | 
|---|
| 2779 | logical breakdown of its topic, but order the sections, and write their | 
|---|
| 2780 | text, so that reading the chapter straight through makes sense.  Do | 
|---|
| 2781 | likewise when structuring the book into chapters, and when structuring a | 
|---|
| 2782 | section into paragraphs.  The watchword is, _at each point, address the | 
|---|
| 2783 | most fundamental and important issue raised by the preceding text._ | 
|---|
| 2784 |  | 
|---|
| 2785 | If necessary, add extra chapters at the beginning of the manual which | 
|---|
| 2786 | are purely tutorial and cover the basics of the subject.  These provide | 
|---|
| 2787 | the framework for a beginner to understand the rest of the manual.  The | 
|---|
| 2788 | Bison manual provides a good example of how to do this. | 
|---|
| 2789 |  | 
|---|
| 2790 | To serve as a reference, a manual should have an Index that list all | 
|---|
| 2791 | the functions, variables, options, and important concepts that are part | 
|---|
| 2792 | of the program.  One combined Index should do for a short manual, but | 
|---|
| 2793 | sometimes for a complex package it is better to use multiple indices. | 
|---|
| 2794 | The Texinfo manual includes advice on preparing good index entries, see | 
|---|
| 2795 | *Note Making Index Entries: (texinfo)Index Entries, and see *Note | 
|---|
| 2796 | Defining the Entries of an Index: (texinfo)Indexing Commands. | 
|---|
| 2797 |  | 
|---|
| 2798 | Don't use Unix man pages as a model for how to write GNU | 
|---|
| 2799 | documentation; most of them are terse, badly structured, and give | 
|---|
| 2800 | inadequate explanation of the underlying concepts.  (There are, of | 
|---|
| 2801 | course, some exceptions.)  Also, Unix man pages use a particular format | 
|---|
| 2802 | which is different from what we use in GNU manuals. | 
|---|
| 2803 |  | 
|---|
| 2804 | Please include an email address in the manual for where to report | 
|---|
| 2805 | bugs _in the manual_. | 
|---|
| 2806 |  | 
|---|
| 2807 | Please do not use the term "pathname" that is used in Unix | 
|---|
| 2808 | documentation; use "file name" (two words) instead.  We use the term | 
|---|
| 2809 | "path" only for search paths, which are lists of directory names. | 
|---|
| 2810 |  | 
|---|
| 2811 | Please do not use the term "illegal" to refer to erroneous input to a | 
|---|
| 2812 | computer program.  Please use "invalid" for this, and reserve the term | 
|---|
| 2813 | "illegal" for activities punishable by law. | 
|---|
| 2814 |  | 
|---|
| 2815 |  | 
|---|
| 2816 | File: standards.info,  Node: Doc Strings and Manuals,  Next: Manual Structure Details,  Prev: GNU Manuals,  Up: Documentation | 
|---|
| 2817 |  | 
|---|
| 2818 | Doc Strings and Manuals | 
|---|
| 2819 | ======================= | 
|---|
| 2820 |  | 
|---|
| 2821 | Some programming systems, such as Emacs, provide a documentation | 
|---|
| 2822 | string for each function, command or variable.  You may be tempted to | 
|---|
| 2823 | write a reference manual by compiling the documentation strings and | 
|---|
| 2824 | writing a little additional text to go around them--but you must not do | 
|---|
| 2825 | it.  That approach is a fundamental mistake.  The text of well-written | 
|---|
| 2826 | documentation strings will be entirely wrong for a manual. | 
|---|
| 2827 |  | 
|---|
| 2828 | A documentation string needs to stand alone--when it appears on the | 
|---|
| 2829 | screen, there will be no other text to introduce or explain it. | 
|---|
| 2830 | Meanwhile, it can be rather informal in style. | 
|---|
| 2831 |  | 
|---|
| 2832 | The text describing a function or variable in a manual must not stand | 
|---|
| 2833 | alone; it appears in the context of a section or subsection.  Other text | 
|---|
| 2834 | at the beginning of the section should explain some of the concepts, and | 
|---|
| 2835 | should often make some general points that apply to several functions or | 
|---|
| 2836 | variables.  The previous descriptions of functions and variables in the | 
|---|
| 2837 | section will also have given information about the topic.  A description | 
|---|
| 2838 | written to stand alone would repeat some of that information; this | 
|---|
| 2839 | redundance looks bad.  Meanwhile, the informality that is acceptable in | 
|---|
| 2840 | a documentation string is totally unacceptable in a manual. | 
|---|
| 2841 |  | 
|---|
| 2842 | The only good way to use documentation strings in writing a good | 
|---|
| 2843 | manual is to use them as a source of information for writing good text. | 
|---|
| 2844 |  | 
|---|
| 2845 |  | 
|---|
| 2846 | File: standards.info,  Node: Manual Structure Details,  Next: License for Manuals,  Prev: Doc Strings and Manuals,  Up: Documentation | 
|---|
| 2847 |  | 
|---|
| 2848 | Manual Structure Details | 
|---|
| 2849 | ======================== | 
|---|
| 2850 |  | 
|---|
| 2851 | The title page of the manual should state the version of the | 
|---|
| 2852 | programs or packages documented in the manual.  The Top node of the | 
|---|
| 2853 | manual should also contain this information.  If the manual is changing | 
|---|
| 2854 | more frequently than or independent of the program, also state a version | 
|---|
| 2855 | number for the manual in both of these places. | 
|---|
| 2856 |  | 
|---|
| 2857 | Each program documented in the manual should have a node named | 
|---|
| 2858 | `PROGRAM Invocation' or `Invoking PROGRAM'.  This node (together with | 
|---|
| 2859 | its subnodes, if any) should describe the program's command line | 
|---|
| 2860 | arguments and how to run it (the sort of information people would look | 
|---|
| 2861 | in a man page for).  Start with an `@example' containing a template for | 
|---|
| 2862 | all the options and arguments that the program uses. | 
|---|
| 2863 |  | 
|---|
| 2864 | Alternatively, put a menu item in some menu whose item name fits one | 
|---|
| 2865 | of the above patterns.  This identifies the node which that item points | 
|---|
| 2866 | to as the node for this purpose, regardless of the node's actual name. | 
|---|
| 2867 |  | 
|---|
| 2868 | The `--usage' feature of the Info reader looks for such a node or | 
|---|
| 2869 | menu item in order to find the relevant text, so it is essential for | 
|---|
| 2870 | every Texinfo file to have one. | 
|---|
| 2871 |  | 
|---|
| 2872 | If one manual describes several programs, it should have such a node | 
|---|
| 2873 | for each program described in the manual. | 
|---|
| 2874 |  | 
|---|
| 2875 |  | 
|---|
| 2876 | File: standards.info,  Node: License for Manuals,  Next: Manual Credits,  Prev: Manual Structure Details,  Up: Documentation | 
|---|
| 2877 |  | 
|---|
| 2878 | License for Manuals | 
|---|
| 2879 | =================== | 
|---|
| 2880 |  | 
|---|
| 2881 | Please use the GNU Free Documentation License for all GNU manuals | 
|---|
| 2882 | that are more than a few pages long.  Likewise for a collection of short | 
|---|
| 2883 | documents--you only need one copy of the GNU FDL for the whole | 
|---|
| 2884 | collection.  For a single short document, you can use a very permissive | 
|---|
| 2885 | non-copyleft license, to avoid taking up space with a long license. | 
|---|
| 2886 |  | 
|---|
| 2887 | See `http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/fdl-howto.html' for more explanation | 
|---|
| 2888 | of how to employ the GFDL. | 
|---|
| 2889 |  | 
|---|
| 2890 | Note that it is not obligatory to include a copy of the GNU GPL or | 
|---|
| 2891 | GNU LGPL in a manual whose license is neither the GPL nor the LGPL.  It | 
|---|
| 2892 | can be a good idea to include the program's license in a large manual; | 
|---|
| 2893 | in a short manual, whose size would be increased considerably by | 
|---|
| 2894 | including the program's license, it is probably better not to include | 
|---|
| 2895 | it. | 
|---|
| 2896 |  | 
|---|
| 2897 |  | 
|---|
| 2898 | File: standards.info,  Node: Manual Credits,  Next: Printed Manuals,  Prev: License for Manuals,  Up: Documentation | 
|---|
| 2899 |  | 
|---|
| 2900 | Manual Credits | 
|---|
| 2901 | ============== | 
|---|
| 2902 |  | 
|---|
| 2903 | Please credit the principal human writers of the manual as the | 
|---|
| 2904 | authors, on the title page of the manual.  If a company sponsored the | 
|---|
| 2905 | work, thank the company in a suitable place in the manual, but do not | 
|---|
| 2906 | cite the company as an author. | 
|---|
| 2907 |  | 
|---|
| 2908 |  | 
|---|
| 2909 | File: standards.info,  Node: Printed Manuals,  Next: NEWS File,  Prev: Manual Credits,  Up: Documentation | 
|---|
| 2910 |  | 
|---|
| 2911 | Printed Manuals | 
|---|
| 2912 | =============== | 
|---|
| 2913 |  | 
|---|
| 2914 | The FSF publishes some GNU manuals in printed form.  To encourage | 
|---|
| 2915 | sales of these manuals, the on-line versions of the manual should | 
|---|
| 2916 | mention at the very start that the printed manual is available and | 
|---|
| 2917 | should point at information for getting it--for instance, with a link | 
|---|
| 2918 | to the page <http://www.gnu.org/order/order.html>.  This should not be | 
|---|
| 2919 | included in the printed manual, though, because there it is redundant. | 
|---|
| 2920 |  | 
|---|
| 2921 | It is also useful to explain in the on-line forms of the manual how | 
|---|
| 2922 | the user can print out the manual from the sources. | 
|---|
| 2923 |  | 
|---|
| 2924 |  | 
|---|
| 2925 | File: standards.info,  Node: NEWS File,  Next: Change Logs,  Prev: Printed Manuals,  Up: Documentation | 
|---|
| 2926 |  | 
|---|
| 2927 | The NEWS File | 
|---|
| 2928 | ============= | 
|---|
| 2929 |  | 
|---|
| 2930 | In addition to its manual, the package should have a file named | 
|---|
| 2931 | `NEWS' which contains a list of user-visible changes worth mentioning. | 
|---|
| 2932 | In each new release, add items to the front of the file and identify | 
|---|
| 2933 | the version they pertain to.  Don't discard old items; leave them in | 
|---|
| 2934 | the file after the newer items.  This way, a user upgrading from any | 
|---|
| 2935 | previous version can see what is new. | 
|---|
| 2936 |  | 
|---|
| 2937 | If the `NEWS' file gets very long, move some of the older items into | 
|---|
| 2938 | a file named `ONEWS' and put a note at the end referring the user to | 
|---|
| 2939 | that file. | 
|---|
| 2940 |  | 
|---|
| 2941 |  | 
|---|
| 2942 | File: standards.info,  Node: Change Logs,  Next: Man Pages,  Prev: NEWS File,  Up: Documentation | 
|---|
| 2943 |  | 
|---|
| 2944 | Change Logs | 
|---|
| 2945 | =========== | 
|---|
| 2946 |  | 
|---|
| 2947 | Keep a change log to describe all the changes made to program source | 
|---|
| 2948 | files.  The purpose of this is so that people investigating bugs in the | 
|---|
| 2949 | future will know about the changes that might have introduced the bug. | 
|---|
| 2950 | Often a new bug can be found by looking at what was recently changed. | 
|---|
| 2951 | More importantly, change logs can help you eliminate conceptual | 
|---|
| 2952 | inconsistencies between different parts of a program, by giving you a | 
|---|
| 2953 | history of how the conflicting concepts arose and who they came from. | 
|---|
| 2954 |  | 
|---|
| 2955 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 2956 |  | 
|---|
| 2957 | * Change Log Concepts:: | 
|---|
| 2958 | * Style of Change Logs:: | 
|---|
| 2959 | * Simple Changes:: | 
|---|
| 2960 | * Conditional Changes:: | 
|---|
| 2961 | * Indicating the Part Changed:: | 
|---|
| 2962 |  | 
|---|
| 2963 |  | 
|---|
| 2964 | File: standards.info,  Node: Change Log Concepts,  Next: Style of Change Logs,  Up: Change Logs | 
|---|
| 2965 |  | 
|---|
| 2966 | Change Log Concepts | 
|---|
| 2967 | ------------------- | 
|---|
| 2968 |  | 
|---|
| 2969 | You can think of the change log as a conceptual "undo list" which | 
|---|
| 2970 | explains how earlier versions were different from the current version. | 
|---|
| 2971 | People can see the current version; they don't need the change log to | 
|---|
| 2972 | tell them what is in it.  What they want from a change log is a clear | 
|---|
| 2973 | explanation of how the earlier version differed. | 
|---|
| 2974 |  | 
|---|
| 2975 | The change log file is normally called `ChangeLog' and covers an | 
|---|
| 2976 | entire directory.  Each directory can have its own change log, or a | 
|---|
| 2977 | directory can use the change log of its parent directory-it's up to you. | 
|---|
| 2978 |  | 
|---|
| 2979 | Another alternative is to record change log information with a | 
|---|
| 2980 | version control system such as RCS or CVS.  This can be converted | 
|---|
| 2981 | automatically to a `ChangeLog' file using `rcs2log'; in Emacs, the | 
|---|
| 2982 | command `C-x v a' (`vc-update-change-log') does the job. | 
|---|
| 2983 |  | 
|---|
| 2984 | There's no need to describe the full purpose of the changes or how | 
|---|
| 2985 | they work together.  If you think that a change calls for explanation, | 
|---|
| 2986 | you're probably right.  Please do explain it--but please put the | 
|---|
| 2987 | explanation in comments in the code, where people will see it whenever | 
|---|
| 2988 | they see the code.  For example, "New function" is enough for the | 
|---|
| 2989 | change log when you add a function, because there should be a comment | 
|---|
| 2990 | before the function definition to explain what it does. | 
|---|
| 2991 |  | 
|---|
| 2992 | However, sometimes it is useful to write one line to describe the | 
|---|
| 2993 | overall purpose of a batch of changes. | 
|---|
| 2994 |  | 
|---|
| 2995 | The easiest way to add an entry to `ChangeLog' is with the Emacs | 
|---|
| 2996 | command `M-x add-change-log-entry'.  An entry should have an asterisk, | 
|---|
| 2997 | the name of the changed file, and then in parentheses the name of the | 
|---|
| 2998 | changed functions, variables or whatever, followed by a colon.  Then | 
|---|
| 2999 | describe the changes you made to that function or variable. | 
|---|
| 3000 |  | 
|---|
| 3001 |  | 
|---|
| 3002 | File: standards.info,  Node: Style of Change Logs,  Next: Simple Changes,  Prev: Change Log Concepts,  Up: Change Logs | 
|---|
| 3003 |  | 
|---|
| 3004 | Style of Change Logs | 
|---|
| 3005 | -------------------- | 
|---|
| 3006 |  | 
|---|
| 3007 | Here are some simple examples of change log entries, starting with | 
|---|
| 3008 | the header line that says who made the change and when, followed by | 
|---|
| 3009 | descriptions of specific changes.  (These examples are drawn from Emacs | 
|---|
| 3010 | and GCC.) | 
|---|
| 3011 |  | 
|---|
| 3012 | 1998-08-17  Richard Stallman  <rms@gnu.org> | 
|---|
| 3013 |  | 
|---|
| 3014 | * register.el (insert-register): Return nil. | 
|---|
| 3015 | (jump-to-register): Likewise. | 
|---|
| 3016 |  | 
|---|
| 3017 | * sort.el (sort-subr): Return nil. | 
|---|
| 3018 |  | 
|---|
| 3019 | * tex-mode.el (tex-bibtex-file, tex-file, tex-region): | 
|---|
| 3020 | Restart the tex shell if process is gone or stopped. | 
|---|
| 3021 | (tex-shell-running): New function. | 
|---|
| 3022 |  | 
|---|
| 3023 | * expr.c (store_one_arg): Round size up for move_block_to_reg. | 
|---|
| 3024 | (expand_call): Round up when emitting USE insns. | 
|---|
| 3025 | * stmt.c (assign_parms): Round size up for move_block_from_reg. | 
|---|
| 3026 |  | 
|---|
| 3027 | It's important to name the changed function or variable in full. | 
|---|
| 3028 | Don't abbreviate function or variable names, and don't combine them. | 
|---|
| 3029 | Subsequent maintainers will often search for a function name to find all | 
|---|
| 3030 | the change log entries that pertain to it; if you abbreviate the name, | 
|---|
| 3031 | they won't find it when they search. | 
|---|
| 3032 |  | 
|---|
| 3033 | For example, some people are tempted to abbreviate groups of function | 
|---|
| 3034 | names by writing `* register.el ({insert,jump-to}-register)'; this is | 
|---|
| 3035 | not a good idea, since searching for `jump-to-register' or | 
|---|
| 3036 | `insert-register' would not find that entry. | 
|---|
| 3037 |  | 
|---|
| 3038 | Separate unrelated change log entries with blank lines.  When two | 
|---|
| 3039 | entries represent parts of the same change, so that they work together, | 
|---|
| 3040 | then don't put blank lines between them.  Then you can omit the file | 
|---|
| 3041 | name and the asterisk when successive entries are in the same file. | 
|---|
| 3042 |  | 
|---|
| 3043 | Break long lists of function names by closing continued lines with | 
|---|
| 3044 | `)', rather than `,', and opening the continuation with `(' as in this | 
|---|
| 3045 | example: | 
|---|
| 3046 |  | 
|---|
| 3047 | * keyboard.c (menu_bar_items, tool_bar_items) | 
|---|
| 3048 | (Fexecute_extended_command): Deal with `keymap' property. | 
|---|
| 3049 |  | 
|---|
| 3050 |  | 
|---|
| 3051 | File: standards.info,  Node: Simple Changes,  Next: Conditional Changes,  Prev: Style of Change Logs,  Up: Change Logs | 
|---|
| 3052 |  | 
|---|
| 3053 | Simple Changes | 
|---|
| 3054 | -------------- | 
|---|
| 3055 |  | 
|---|
| 3056 | Certain simple kinds of changes don't need much detail in the change | 
|---|
| 3057 | log. | 
|---|
| 3058 |  | 
|---|
| 3059 | When you change the calling sequence of a function in a simple | 
|---|
| 3060 | fashion, and you change all the callers of the function to use the new | 
|---|
| 3061 | calling sequence, there is no need to make individual entries for all | 
|---|
| 3062 | the callers that you changed.  Just write in the entry for the function | 
|---|
| 3063 | being called, "All callers changed"--like this: | 
|---|
| 3064 |  | 
|---|
| 3065 | * keyboard.c (Fcommand_execute): New arg SPECIAL. | 
|---|
| 3066 | All callers changed. | 
|---|
| 3067 |  | 
|---|
| 3068 | When you change just comments or doc strings, it is enough to write | 
|---|
| 3069 | an entry for the file, without mentioning the functions.  Just "Doc | 
|---|
| 3070 | fixes" is enough for the change log. | 
|---|
| 3071 |  | 
|---|
| 3072 | There's no need to make change log entries for documentation files. | 
|---|
| 3073 | This is because documentation is not susceptible to bugs that are hard | 
|---|
| 3074 | to fix.  Documentation does not consist of parts that must interact in a | 
|---|
| 3075 | precisely engineered fashion.  To correct an error, you need not know | 
|---|
| 3076 | the history of the erroneous passage; it is enough to compare what the | 
|---|
| 3077 | documentation says with the way the program actually works. | 
|---|
| 3078 |  | 
|---|
| 3079 |  | 
|---|
| 3080 | File: standards.info,  Node: Conditional Changes,  Next: Indicating the Part Changed,  Prev: Simple Changes,  Up: Change Logs | 
|---|
| 3081 |  | 
|---|
| 3082 | Conditional Changes | 
|---|
| 3083 | ------------------- | 
|---|
| 3084 |  | 
|---|
| 3085 | C programs often contain compile-time `#if' conditionals.  Many | 
|---|
| 3086 | changes are conditional; sometimes you add a new definition which is | 
|---|
| 3087 | entirely contained in a conditional.  It is very useful to indicate in | 
|---|
| 3088 | the change log the conditions for which the change applies. | 
|---|
| 3089 |  | 
|---|
| 3090 | Our convention for indicating conditional changes is to use square | 
|---|
| 3091 | brackets around the name of the condition. | 
|---|
| 3092 |  | 
|---|
| 3093 | Here is a simple example, describing a change which is conditional | 
|---|
| 3094 | but does not have a function or entity name associated with it: | 
|---|
| 3095 |  | 
|---|
| 3096 | * xterm.c [SOLARIS2]: Include string.h. | 
|---|
| 3097 |  | 
|---|
| 3098 | Here is an entry describing a new definition which is entirely | 
|---|
| 3099 | conditional.  This new definition for the macro `FRAME_WINDOW_P' is | 
|---|
| 3100 | used only when `HAVE_X_WINDOWS' is defined: | 
|---|
| 3101 |  | 
|---|
| 3102 | * frame.h [HAVE_X_WINDOWS] (FRAME_WINDOW_P): Macro defined. | 
|---|
| 3103 |  | 
|---|
| 3104 | Here is an entry for a change within the function `init_display', | 
|---|
| 3105 | whose definition as a whole is unconditional, but the changes themselves | 
|---|
| 3106 | are contained in a `#ifdef HAVE_LIBNCURSES' conditional: | 
|---|
| 3107 |  | 
|---|
| 3108 | * dispnew.c (init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent. | 
|---|
| 3109 |  | 
|---|
| 3110 | Here is an entry for a change that takes affect only when a certain | 
|---|
| 3111 | macro is _not_ defined: | 
|---|
| 3112 |  | 
|---|
| 3113 | (gethostname) [!HAVE_SOCKETS]: Replace with winsock version. | 
|---|
| 3114 |  | 
|---|
| 3115 |  | 
|---|
| 3116 | File: standards.info,  Node: Indicating the Part Changed,  Prev: Conditional Changes,  Up: Change Logs | 
|---|
| 3117 |  | 
|---|
| 3118 | Indicating the Part Changed | 
|---|
| 3119 | --------------------------- | 
|---|
| 3120 |  | 
|---|
| 3121 | Indicate the part of a function which changed by using angle brackets | 
|---|
| 3122 | enclosing an indication of what the changed part does.  Here is an entry | 
|---|
| 3123 | for a change in the part of the function `sh-while-getopts' that deals | 
|---|
| 3124 | with `sh' commands: | 
|---|
| 3125 |  | 
|---|
| 3126 | * progmodes/sh-script.el (sh-while-getopts) <sh>: Handle case that | 
|---|
| 3127 | user-specified option string is empty. | 
|---|
| 3128 |  | 
|---|
| 3129 |  | 
|---|
| 3130 | File: standards.info,  Node: Man Pages,  Next: Reading other Manuals,  Prev: Change Logs,  Up: Documentation | 
|---|
| 3131 |  | 
|---|
| 3132 | Man Pages | 
|---|
| 3133 | ========= | 
|---|
| 3134 |  | 
|---|
| 3135 | In the GNU project, man pages are secondary.  It is not necessary or | 
|---|
| 3136 | expected for every GNU program to have a man page, but some of them do. | 
|---|
| 3137 | It's your choice whether to include a man page in your program. | 
|---|
| 3138 |  | 
|---|
| 3139 | When you make this decision, consider that supporting a man page | 
|---|
| 3140 | requires continual effort each time the program is changed.  The time | 
|---|
| 3141 | you spend on the man page is time taken away from more useful work. | 
|---|
| 3142 |  | 
|---|
| 3143 | For a simple program which changes little, updating the man page may | 
|---|
| 3144 | be a small job.  Then there is little reason not to include a man page, | 
|---|
| 3145 | if you have one. | 
|---|
| 3146 |  | 
|---|
| 3147 | For a large program that changes a great deal, updating a man page | 
|---|
| 3148 | may be a substantial burden.  If a user offers to donate a man page, | 
|---|
| 3149 | you may find this gift costly to accept.  It may be better to refuse | 
|---|
| 3150 | the man page unless the same person agrees to take full responsibility | 
|---|
| 3151 | for maintaining it--so that you can wash your hands of it entirely.  If | 
|---|
| 3152 | this volunteer later ceases to do the job, then don't feel obliged to | 
|---|
| 3153 | pick it up yourself; it may be better to withdraw the man page from the | 
|---|
| 3154 | distribution until someone else agrees to update it. | 
|---|
| 3155 |  | 
|---|
| 3156 | When a program changes only a little, you may feel that the | 
|---|
| 3157 | discrepancies are small enough that the man page remains useful without | 
|---|
| 3158 | updating.  If so, put a prominent note near the beginning of the man | 
|---|
| 3159 | page explaining that you don't maintain it and that the Texinfo manual | 
|---|
| 3160 | is more authoritative.  The note should say how to access the Texinfo | 
|---|
| 3161 | documentation. | 
|---|
| 3162 |  | 
|---|
| 3163 |  | 
|---|
| 3164 | File: standards.info,  Node: Reading other Manuals,  Prev: Man Pages,  Up: Documentation | 
|---|
| 3165 |  | 
|---|
| 3166 | Reading other Manuals | 
|---|
| 3167 | ===================== | 
|---|
| 3168 |  | 
|---|
| 3169 | There may be non-free books or documentation files that describe the | 
|---|
| 3170 | program you are documenting. | 
|---|
| 3171 |  | 
|---|
| 3172 | It is ok to use these documents for reference, just as the author of | 
|---|
| 3173 | a new algebra textbook can read other books on algebra.  A large portion | 
|---|
| 3174 | of any non-fiction book consists of facts, in this case facts about how | 
|---|
| 3175 | a certain program works, and these facts are necessarily the same for | 
|---|
| 3176 | everyone who writes about the subject.  But be careful not to copy your | 
|---|
| 3177 | outline structure, wording, tables or examples from preexisting non-free | 
|---|
| 3178 | documentation.  Copying from free documentation may be ok; please check | 
|---|
| 3179 | with the FSF about the individual case. | 
|---|
| 3180 |  | 
|---|
| 3181 |  | 
|---|
| 3182 | File: standards.info,  Node: Managing Releases,  Next: References,  Prev: Documentation,  Up: Top | 
|---|
| 3183 |  | 
|---|
| 3184 | The Release Process | 
|---|
| 3185 | ******************* | 
|---|
| 3186 |  | 
|---|
| 3187 | Making a release is more than just bundling up your source files in a | 
|---|
| 3188 | tar file and putting it up for FTP.  You should set up your software so | 
|---|
| 3189 | that it can be configured to run on a variety of systems.  Your Makefile | 
|---|
| 3190 | should conform to the GNU standards described below, and your directory | 
|---|
| 3191 | layout should also conform to the standards discussed below.  Doing so | 
|---|
| 3192 | makes it easy to include your package into the larger framework of all | 
|---|
| 3193 | GNU software. | 
|---|
| 3194 |  | 
|---|
| 3195 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 3196 |  | 
|---|
| 3197 | * Configuration::               How Configuration Should Work | 
|---|
| 3198 | * Makefile Conventions::        Makefile Conventions | 
|---|
| 3199 | * Releases::                    Making Releases | 
|---|
| 3200 |  | 
|---|
| 3201 |  | 
|---|
| 3202 | File: standards.info,  Node: Configuration,  Next: Makefile Conventions,  Up: Managing Releases | 
|---|
| 3203 |  | 
|---|
| 3204 | How Configuration Should Work | 
|---|
| 3205 | ============================= | 
|---|
| 3206 |  | 
|---|
| 3207 | Each GNU distribution should come with a shell script named | 
|---|
| 3208 | `configure'.  This script is given arguments which describe the kind of | 
|---|
| 3209 | machine and system you want to compile the program for. | 
|---|
| 3210 |  | 
|---|
| 3211 | The `configure' script must record the configuration options so that | 
|---|
| 3212 | they affect compilation. | 
|---|
| 3213 |  | 
|---|
| 3214 | One way to do this is to make a link from a standard name such as | 
|---|
| 3215 | `config.h' to the proper configuration file for the chosen system.  If | 
|---|
| 3216 | you use this technique, the distribution should _not_ contain a file | 
|---|
| 3217 | named `config.h'.  This is so that people won't be able to build the | 
|---|
| 3218 | program without configuring it first. | 
|---|
| 3219 |  | 
|---|
| 3220 | Another thing that `configure' can do is to edit the Makefile.  If | 
|---|
| 3221 | you do this, the distribution should _not_ contain a file named | 
|---|
| 3222 | `Makefile'.  Instead, it should include a file `Makefile.in' which | 
|---|
| 3223 | contains the input used for editing.  Once again, this is so that people | 
|---|
| 3224 | won't be able to build the program without configuring it first. | 
|---|
| 3225 |  | 
|---|
| 3226 | If `configure' does write the `Makefile', then `Makefile' should | 
|---|
| 3227 | have a target named `Makefile' which causes `configure' to be rerun, | 
|---|
| 3228 | setting up the same configuration that was set up last time.  The files | 
|---|
| 3229 | that `configure' reads should be listed as dependencies of `Makefile'. | 
|---|
| 3230 |  | 
|---|
| 3231 | All the files which are output from the `configure' script should | 
|---|
| 3232 | have comments at the beginning explaining that they were generated | 
|---|
| 3233 | automatically using `configure'.  This is so that users won't think of | 
|---|
| 3234 | trying to edit them by hand. | 
|---|
| 3235 |  | 
|---|
| 3236 | The `configure' script should write a file named `config.status' | 
|---|
| 3237 | which describes which configuration options were specified when the | 
|---|
| 3238 | program was last configured.  This file should be a shell script which, | 
|---|
| 3239 | if run, will recreate the same configuration. | 
|---|
| 3240 |  | 
|---|
| 3241 | The `configure' script should accept an option of the form | 
|---|
| 3242 | `--srcdir=DIRNAME' to specify the directory where sources are found (if | 
|---|
| 3243 | it is not the current directory).  This makes it possible to build the | 
|---|
| 3244 | program in a separate directory, so that the actual source directory is | 
|---|
| 3245 | not modified. | 
|---|
| 3246 |  | 
|---|
| 3247 | If the user does not specify `--srcdir', then `configure' should | 
|---|
| 3248 | check both `.' and `..' to see if it can find the sources.  If it finds | 
|---|
| 3249 | the sources in one of these places, it should use them from there. | 
|---|
| 3250 | Otherwise, it should report that it cannot find the sources, and should | 
|---|
| 3251 | exit with nonzero status. | 
|---|
| 3252 |  | 
|---|
| 3253 | Usually the easy way to support `--srcdir' is by editing a | 
|---|
| 3254 | definition of `VPATH' into the Makefile.  Some rules may need to refer | 
|---|
| 3255 | explicitly to the specified source directory.  To make this possible, | 
|---|
| 3256 | `configure' can add to the Makefile a variable named `srcdir' whose | 
|---|
| 3257 | value is precisely the specified directory. | 
|---|
| 3258 |  | 
|---|
| 3259 | The `configure' script should also take an argument which specifies | 
|---|
| 3260 | the type of system to build the program for.  This argument should look | 
|---|
| 3261 | like this: | 
|---|
| 3262 |  | 
|---|
| 3263 | CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM | 
|---|
| 3264 |  | 
|---|
| 3265 | For example, a Sun 3 might be `m68k-sun-sunos4.1'. | 
|---|
| 3266 |  | 
|---|
| 3267 | The `configure' script needs to be able to decode all plausible | 
|---|
| 3268 | alternatives for how to describe a machine.  Thus, `sun3-sunos4.1' | 
|---|
| 3269 | would be a valid alias.  For many programs, `vax-dec-ultrix' would be | 
|---|
| 3270 | an alias for `vax-dec-bsd', simply because the differences between | 
|---|
| 3271 | Ultrix and BSD are rarely noticeable, but a few programs might need to | 
|---|
| 3272 | distinguish them. | 
|---|
| 3273 |  | 
|---|
| 3274 | There is a shell script called `config.sub' that you can use as a | 
|---|
| 3275 | subroutine to validate system types and canonicalize aliases. | 
|---|
| 3276 |  | 
|---|
| 3277 | Other options are permitted to specify in more detail the software | 
|---|
| 3278 | or hardware present on the machine, and include or exclude optional | 
|---|
| 3279 | parts of the package: | 
|---|
| 3280 |  | 
|---|
| 3281 | `--enable-FEATURE[=PARAMETER]' | 
|---|
| 3282 | Configure the package to build and install an optional user-level | 
|---|
| 3283 | facility called FEATURE.  This allows users to choose which | 
|---|
| 3284 | optional features to include.  Giving an optional PARAMETER of | 
|---|
| 3285 | `no' should omit FEATURE, if it is built by default. | 
|---|
| 3286 |  | 
|---|
| 3287 | No `--enable' option should *ever* cause one feature to replace | 
|---|
| 3288 | another.  No `--enable' option should ever substitute one useful | 
|---|
| 3289 | behavior for another useful behavior.  The only proper use for | 
|---|
| 3290 | `--enable' is for questions of whether to build part of the program | 
|---|
| 3291 | or exclude it. | 
|---|
| 3292 |  | 
|---|
| 3293 | `--with-PACKAGE' | 
|---|
| 3294 | The package PACKAGE will be installed, so configure this package | 
|---|
| 3295 | to work with PACKAGE. | 
|---|
| 3296 |  | 
|---|
| 3297 | Possible values of PACKAGE include `gnu-as' (or `gas'), `gnu-ld', | 
|---|
| 3298 | `gnu-libc', `gdb', `x', and `x-toolkit'. | 
|---|
| 3299 |  | 
|---|
| 3300 | Do not use a `--with' option to specify the file name to use to | 
|---|
| 3301 | find certain files.  That is outside the scope of what `--with' | 
|---|
| 3302 | options are for. | 
|---|
| 3303 |  | 
|---|
| 3304 | All `configure' scripts should accept all of these "detail" options, | 
|---|
| 3305 | whether or not they make any difference to the particular package at | 
|---|
| 3306 | hand.  In particular, they should accept any option that starts with | 
|---|
| 3307 | `--with-' or `--enable-'.  This is so users will be able to configure | 
|---|
| 3308 | an entire GNU source tree at once with a single set of options. | 
|---|
| 3309 |  | 
|---|
| 3310 | You will note that the categories `--with-' and `--enable-' are | 
|---|
| 3311 | narrow: they *do not* provide a place for any sort of option you might | 
|---|
| 3312 | think of.  That is deliberate.  We want to limit the possible | 
|---|
| 3313 | configuration options in GNU software.  We do not want GNU programs to | 
|---|
| 3314 | have idiosyncratic configuration options. | 
|---|
| 3315 |  | 
|---|
| 3316 | Packages that perform part of the compilation process may support | 
|---|
| 3317 | cross-compilation.  In such a case, the host and target machines for the | 
|---|
| 3318 | program may be different. | 
|---|
| 3319 |  | 
|---|
| 3320 | The `configure' script should normally treat the specified type of | 
|---|
| 3321 | system as both the host and the target, thus producing a program which | 
|---|
| 3322 | works for the same type of machine that it runs on. | 
|---|
| 3323 |  | 
|---|
| 3324 | To configure a cross-compiler, cross-assembler, or what have you, you | 
|---|
| 3325 | should specify a target different from the host, using the configure | 
|---|
| 3326 | option `--target=TARGETTYPE'.  The syntax for TARGETTYPE is the same as | 
|---|
| 3327 | for the host type.  So the command would look like this: | 
|---|
| 3328 |  | 
|---|
| 3329 | ./configure HOSTTYPE --target=TARGETTYPE | 
|---|
| 3330 |  | 
|---|
| 3331 | Programs for which cross-operation is not meaningful need not accept | 
|---|
| 3332 | the `--target' option, because configuring an entire operating system | 
|---|
| 3333 | for cross-operation is not a meaningful operation. | 
|---|
| 3334 |  | 
|---|
| 3335 | Bootstrapping a cross-compiler requires compiling it on a machine | 
|---|
| 3336 | other than the host it will run on.  Compilation packages accept a | 
|---|
| 3337 | configuration option `--build=BUILDTYPE' for specifying the | 
|---|
| 3338 | configuration on which you will compile them, but the configure script | 
|---|
| 3339 | should normally guess the build machine type (using `config.guess'), so | 
|---|
| 3340 | this option is probably not necessary.  The host and target types | 
|---|
| 3341 | normally default from the build type, so in bootstrapping a | 
|---|
| 3342 | cross-compiler you must specify them both explicitly. | 
|---|
| 3343 |  | 
|---|
| 3344 | Some programs have ways of configuring themselves automatically.  If | 
|---|
| 3345 | your program is set up to do this, your `configure' script can simply | 
|---|
| 3346 | ignore most of its arguments. | 
|---|
| 3347 |  | 
|---|
| 3348 |  | 
|---|
| 3349 | File: standards.info,  Node: Makefile Conventions,  Next: Releases,  Prev: Configuration,  Up: Managing Releases | 
|---|
| 3350 |  | 
|---|
| 3351 | Makefile Conventions | 
|---|
| 3352 | ==================== | 
|---|
| 3353 |  | 
|---|
| 3354 | This node describes conventions for writing the Makefiles for GNU | 
|---|
| 3355 | programs.  Using Automake will help you write a Makefile that follows | 
|---|
| 3356 | these conventions. | 
|---|
| 3357 |  | 
|---|
| 3358 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 3359 |  | 
|---|
| 3360 | * Makefile Basics::             General Conventions for Makefiles | 
|---|
| 3361 | * Utilities in Makefiles::      Utilities in Makefiles | 
|---|
| 3362 | * Command Variables::           Variables for Specifying Commands | 
|---|
| 3363 | * Directory Variables::         Variables for Installation Directories | 
|---|
| 3364 | * Standard Targets::            Standard Targets for Users | 
|---|
| 3365 | * Install Command Categories::  Three categories of commands in the `install' | 
|---|
| 3366 | rule: normal, pre-install and post-install. | 
|---|
| 3367 |  | 
|---|
| 3368 |  | 
|---|
| 3369 | File: standards.info,  Node: Makefile Basics,  Next: Utilities in Makefiles,  Up: Makefile Conventions | 
|---|
| 3370 |  | 
|---|
| 3371 | General Conventions for Makefiles | 
|---|
| 3372 | --------------------------------- | 
|---|
| 3373 |  | 
|---|
| 3374 | Every Makefile should contain this line: | 
|---|
| 3375 |  | 
|---|
| 3376 | SHELL = /bin/sh | 
|---|
| 3377 |  | 
|---|
| 3378 | to avoid trouble on systems where the `SHELL' variable might be | 
|---|
| 3379 | inherited from the environment.  (This is never a problem with GNU | 
|---|
| 3380 | `make'.) | 
|---|
| 3381 |  | 
|---|
| 3382 | Different `make' programs have incompatible suffix lists and | 
|---|
| 3383 | implicit rules, and this sometimes creates confusion or misbehavior.  So | 
|---|
| 3384 | it is a good idea to set the suffix list explicitly using only the | 
|---|
| 3385 | suffixes you need in the particular Makefile, like this: | 
|---|
| 3386 |  | 
|---|
| 3387 | .SUFFIXES: | 
|---|
| 3388 | .SUFFIXES: .c .o | 
|---|
| 3389 |  | 
|---|
| 3390 | The first line clears out the suffix list, the second introduces all | 
|---|
| 3391 | suffixes which may be subject to implicit rules in this Makefile. | 
|---|
| 3392 |  | 
|---|
| 3393 | Don't assume that `.' is in the path for command execution.  When | 
|---|
| 3394 | you need to run programs that are a part of your package during the | 
|---|
| 3395 | make, please make sure that it uses `./' if the program is built as | 
|---|
| 3396 | part of the make or `$(srcdir)/' if the file is an unchanging part of | 
|---|
| 3397 | the source code.  Without one of these prefixes, the current search | 
|---|
| 3398 | path is used. | 
|---|
| 3399 |  | 
|---|
| 3400 | The distinction between `./' (the "build directory") and | 
|---|
| 3401 | `$(srcdir)/' (the "source directory") is important because users can | 
|---|
| 3402 | build in a separate directory using the `--srcdir' option to | 
|---|
| 3403 | `configure'.  A rule of the form: | 
|---|
| 3404 |  | 
|---|
| 3405 | foo.1 : foo.man sedscript | 
|---|
| 3406 | sed -e sedscript foo.man > foo.1 | 
|---|
| 3407 |  | 
|---|
| 3408 | will fail when the build directory is not the source directory, because | 
|---|
| 3409 | `foo.man' and `sedscript' are in the source directory. | 
|---|
| 3410 |  | 
|---|
| 3411 | When using GNU `make', relying on `VPATH' to find the source file | 
|---|
| 3412 | will work in the case where there is a single dependency file, since | 
|---|
| 3413 | the `make' automatic variable `$<' will represent the source file | 
|---|
| 3414 | wherever it is.  (Many versions of `make' set `$<' only in implicit | 
|---|
| 3415 | rules.)  A Makefile target like | 
|---|
| 3416 |  | 
|---|
| 3417 | foo.o : bar.c | 
|---|
| 3418 | $(CC) -I. -I$(srcdir) $(CFLAGS) -c bar.c -o foo.o | 
|---|
| 3419 |  | 
|---|
| 3420 | should instead be written as | 
|---|
| 3421 |  | 
|---|
| 3422 | foo.o : bar.c | 
|---|
| 3423 | $(CC) -I. -I$(srcdir) $(CFLAGS) -c $< -o $@ | 
|---|
| 3424 |  | 
|---|
| 3425 | in order to allow `VPATH' to work correctly.  When the target has | 
|---|
| 3426 | multiple dependencies, using an explicit `$(srcdir)' is the easiest way | 
|---|
| 3427 | to make the rule work well.  For example, the target above for `foo.1' | 
|---|
| 3428 | is best written as: | 
|---|
| 3429 |  | 
|---|
| 3430 | foo.1 : foo.man sedscript | 
|---|
| 3431 | sed -e $(srcdir)/sedscript $(srcdir)/foo.man > $@ | 
|---|
| 3432 |  | 
|---|
| 3433 | GNU distributions usually contain some files which are not source | 
|---|
| 3434 | files--for example, Info files, and the output from Autoconf, Automake, | 
|---|
| 3435 | Bison or Flex.  Since these files normally appear in the source | 
|---|
| 3436 | directory, they should always appear in the source directory, not in the | 
|---|
| 3437 | build directory.  So Makefile rules to update them should put the | 
|---|
| 3438 | updated files in the source directory. | 
|---|
| 3439 |  | 
|---|
| 3440 | However, if a file does not appear in the distribution, then the | 
|---|
| 3441 | Makefile should not put it in the source directory, because building a | 
|---|
| 3442 | program in ordinary circumstances should not modify the source directory | 
|---|
| 3443 | in any way. | 
|---|
| 3444 |  | 
|---|
| 3445 | Try to make the build and installation targets, at least (and all | 
|---|
| 3446 | their subtargets) work correctly with a parallel `make'. | 
|---|
| 3447 |  | 
|---|
| 3448 |  | 
|---|
| 3449 | File: standards.info,  Node: Utilities in Makefiles,  Next: Command Variables,  Prev: Makefile Basics,  Up: Makefile Conventions | 
|---|
| 3450 |  | 
|---|
| 3451 | Utilities in Makefiles | 
|---|
| 3452 | ---------------------- | 
|---|
| 3453 |  | 
|---|
| 3454 | Write the Makefile commands (and any shell scripts, such as | 
|---|
| 3455 | `configure') to run in `sh', not in `csh'.  Don't use any special | 
|---|
| 3456 | features of `ksh' or `bash'. | 
|---|
| 3457 |  | 
|---|
| 3458 | The `configure' script and the Makefile rules for building and | 
|---|
| 3459 | installation should not use any utilities directly except these: | 
|---|
| 3460 |  | 
|---|
| 3461 | cat cmp cp diff echo egrep expr false grep install-info | 
|---|
| 3462 | ln ls mkdir mv pwd rm rmdir sed sleep sort tar test touch true | 
|---|
| 3463 |  | 
|---|
| 3464 | The compression program `gzip' can be used in the `dist' rule. | 
|---|
| 3465 |  | 
|---|
| 3466 | Stick to the generally supported options for these programs.  For | 
|---|
| 3467 | example, don't use `mkdir -p', convenient as it may be, because most | 
|---|
| 3468 | systems don't support it. | 
|---|
| 3469 |  | 
|---|
| 3470 | It is a good idea to avoid creating symbolic links in makefiles, | 
|---|
| 3471 | since a few systems don't support them. | 
|---|
| 3472 |  | 
|---|
| 3473 | The Makefile rules for building and installation can also use | 
|---|
| 3474 | compilers and related programs, but should do so via `make' variables | 
|---|
| 3475 | so that the user can substitute alternatives.  Here are some of the | 
|---|
| 3476 | programs we mean: | 
|---|
| 3477 |  | 
|---|
| 3478 | ar bison cc flex install ld ldconfig lex | 
|---|
| 3479 | make makeinfo ranlib texi2dvi yacc | 
|---|
| 3480 |  | 
|---|
| 3481 | Use the following `make' variables to run those programs: | 
|---|
| 3482 |  | 
|---|
| 3483 | $(AR) $(BISON) $(CC) $(FLEX) $(INSTALL) $(LD) $(LDCONFIG) $(LEX) | 
|---|
| 3484 | $(MAKE) $(MAKEINFO) $(RANLIB) $(TEXI2DVI) $(YACC) | 
|---|
| 3485 |  | 
|---|
| 3486 | When you use `ranlib' or `ldconfig', you should make sure nothing | 
|---|
| 3487 | bad happens if the system does not have the program in question. | 
|---|
| 3488 | Arrange to ignore an error from that command, and print a message before | 
|---|
| 3489 | the command to tell the user that failure of this command does not mean | 
|---|
| 3490 | a problem.  (The Autoconf `AC_PROG_RANLIB' macro can help with this.) | 
|---|
| 3491 |  | 
|---|
| 3492 | If you use symbolic links, you should implement a fallback for | 
|---|
| 3493 | systems that don't have symbolic links. | 
|---|
| 3494 |  | 
|---|
| 3495 | Additional utilities that can be used via Make variables are: | 
|---|
| 3496 |  | 
|---|
| 3497 | chgrp chmod chown mknod | 
|---|
| 3498 |  | 
|---|
| 3499 | It is ok to use other utilities in Makefile portions (or scripts) | 
|---|
| 3500 | intended only for particular systems where you know those utilities | 
|---|
| 3501 | exist. | 
|---|
| 3502 |  | 
|---|
| 3503 |  | 
|---|
| 3504 | File: standards.info,  Node: Command Variables,  Next: Directory Variables,  Prev: Utilities in Makefiles,  Up: Makefile Conventions | 
|---|
| 3505 |  | 
|---|
| 3506 | Variables for Specifying Commands | 
|---|
| 3507 | --------------------------------- | 
|---|
| 3508 |  | 
|---|
| 3509 | Makefiles should provide variables for overriding certain commands, | 
|---|
| 3510 | options, and so on. | 
|---|
| 3511 |  | 
|---|
| 3512 | In particular, you should run most utility programs via variables. | 
|---|
| 3513 | Thus, if you use Bison, have a variable named `BISON' whose default | 
|---|
| 3514 | value is set with `BISON = bison', and refer to it with `$(BISON)' | 
|---|
| 3515 | whenever you need to use Bison. | 
|---|
| 3516 |  | 
|---|
| 3517 | File management utilities such as `ln', `rm', `mv', and so on, need | 
|---|
| 3518 | not be referred to through variables in this way, since users don't | 
|---|
| 3519 | need to replace them with other programs. | 
|---|
| 3520 |  | 
|---|
| 3521 | Each program-name variable should come with an options variable that | 
|---|
| 3522 | is used to supply options to the program.  Append `FLAGS' to the | 
|---|
| 3523 | program-name variable name to get the options variable name--for | 
|---|
| 3524 | example, `BISONFLAGS'.  (The names `CFLAGS' for the C compiler, | 
|---|
| 3525 | `YFLAGS' for yacc, and `LFLAGS' for lex, are exceptions to this rule, | 
|---|
| 3526 | but we keep them because they are standard.)  Use `CPPFLAGS' in any | 
|---|
| 3527 | compilation command that runs the preprocessor, and use `LDFLAGS' in | 
|---|
| 3528 | any compilation command that does linking as well as in any direct use | 
|---|
| 3529 | of `ld'. | 
|---|
| 3530 |  | 
|---|
| 3531 | If there are C compiler options that _must_ be used for proper | 
|---|
| 3532 | compilation of certain files, do not include them in `CFLAGS'.  Users | 
|---|
| 3533 | expect to be able to specify `CFLAGS' freely themselves.  Instead, | 
|---|
| 3534 | arrange to pass the necessary options to the C compiler independently | 
|---|
| 3535 | of `CFLAGS', by writing them explicitly in the compilation commands or | 
|---|
| 3536 | by defining an implicit rule, like this: | 
|---|
| 3537 |  | 
|---|
| 3538 | CFLAGS = -g | 
|---|
| 3539 | ALL_CFLAGS = -I. $(CFLAGS) | 
|---|
| 3540 | .c.o: | 
|---|
| 3541 | $(CC) -c $(CPPFLAGS) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< | 
|---|
| 3542 |  | 
|---|
| 3543 | Do include the `-g' option in `CFLAGS', because that is not | 
|---|
| 3544 | _required_ for proper compilation.  You can consider it a default that | 
|---|
| 3545 | is only recommended.  If the package is set up so that it is compiled | 
|---|
| 3546 | with GCC by default, then you might as well include `-O' in the default | 
|---|
| 3547 | value of `CFLAGS' as well. | 
|---|
| 3548 |  | 
|---|
| 3549 | Put `CFLAGS' last in the compilation command, after other variables | 
|---|
| 3550 | containing compiler options, so the user can use `CFLAGS' to override | 
|---|
| 3551 | the others. | 
|---|
| 3552 |  | 
|---|
| 3553 | `CFLAGS' should be used in every invocation of the C compiler, both | 
|---|
| 3554 | those which do compilation and those which do linking. | 
|---|
| 3555 |  | 
|---|
| 3556 | Every Makefile should define the variable `INSTALL', which is the | 
|---|
| 3557 | basic command for installing a file into the system. | 
|---|
| 3558 |  | 
|---|
| 3559 | Every Makefile should also define the variables `INSTALL_PROGRAM' | 
|---|
| 3560 | and `INSTALL_DATA'.  (The default for `INSTALL_PROGRAM' should be | 
|---|
| 3561 | `$(INSTALL)'; the default for `INSTALL_DATA' should be `${INSTALL} -m | 
|---|
| 3562 | 644'.)  Then it should use those variables as the commands for actual | 
|---|
| 3563 | installation, for executables and nonexecutables respectively.  Use | 
|---|
| 3564 | these variables as follows: | 
|---|
| 3565 |  | 
|---|
| 3566 | $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) foo $(bindir)/foo | 
|---|
| 3567 | $(INSTALL_DATA) libfoo.a $(libdir)/libfoo.a | 
|---|
| 3568 |  | 
|---|
| 3569 | Optionally, you may prepend the value of `DESTDIR' to the target | 
|---|
| 3570 | filename.  Doing this allows the installer to create a snapshot of the | 
|---|
| 3571 | installation to be copied onto the real target filesystem later.  Do not | 
|---|
| 3572 | set the value of `DESTDIR' in your Makefile, and do not include it in | 
|---|
| 3573 | any installed files.  With support for `DESTDIR', the above examples | 
|---|
| 3574 | become: | 
|---|
| 3575 |  | 
|---|
| 3576 | $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) foo $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/foo | 
|---|
| 3577 | $(INSTALL_DATA) libfoo.a $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/libfoo.a | 
|---|
| 3578 |  | 
|---|
| 3579 | Always use a file name, not a directory name, as the second argument of | 
|---|
| 3580 | the installation commands.  Use a separate command for each file to be | 
|---|
| 3581 | installed. | 
|---|
| 3582 |  | 
|---|
| 3583 |  | 
|---|
| 3584 | File: standards.info,  Node: Directory Variables,  Next: Standard Targets,  Prev: Command Variables,  Up: Makefile Conventions | 
|---|
| 3585 |  | 
|---|
| 3586 | Variables for Installation Directories | 
|---|
| 3587 | -------------------------------------- | 
|---|
| 3588 |  | 
|---|
| 3589 | Installation directories should always be named by variables, so it | 
|---|
| 3590 | is easy to install in a nonstandard place.  The standard names for these | 
|---|
| 3591 | variables are described below.  They are based on a standard filesystem | 
|---|
| 3592 | layout; variants of it are used in SVR4, 4.4BSD, GNU/Linux, Ultrix v4, | 
|---|
| 3593 | and other modern operating systems. | 
|---|
| 3594 |  | 
|---|
| 3595 | These two variables set the root for the installation.  All the other | 
|---|
| 3596 | installation directories should be subdirectories of one of these two, | 
|---|
| 3597 | and nothing should be directly installed into these two directories. | 
|---|
| 3598 |  | 
|---|
| 3599 | `prefix' | 
|---|
| 3600 | A prefix used in constructing the default values of the variables | 
|---|
| 3601 | listed below.  The default value of `prefix' should be | 
|---|
| 3602 | `/usr/local'.  When building the complete GNU system, the prefix | 
|---|
| 3603 | will be empty and `/usr' will be a symbolic link to `/'.  (If you | 
|---|
| 3604 | are using Autoconf, write it as `@prefix@'.) | 
|---|
| 3605 |  | 
|---|
| 3606 | Running `make install' with a different value of `prefix' from the | 
|---|
| 3607 | one used to build the program should _not_ recompile the program. | 
|---|
| 3608 |  | 
|---|
| 3609 | `exec_prefix' | 
|---|
| 3610 | A prefix used in constructing the default values of some of the | 
|---|
| 3611 | variables listed below.  The default value of `exec_prefix' should | 
|---|
| 3612 | be `$(prefix)'.  (If you are using Autoconf, write it as | 
|---|
| 3613 | `@exec_prefix@'.) | 
|---|
| 3614 |  | 
|---|
| 3615 | Generally, `$(exec_prefix)' is used for directories that contain | 
|---|
| 3616 | machine-specific files (such as executables and subroutine | 
|---|
| 3617 | libraries), while `$(prefix)' is used directly for other | 
|---|
| 3618 | directories. | 
|---|
| 3619 |  | 
|---|
| 3620 | Running `make install' with a different value of `exec_prefix' | 
|---|
| 3621 | from the one used to build the program should _not_ recompile the | 
|---|
| 3622 | program. | 
|---|
| 3623 |  | 
|---|
| 3624 | Executable programs are installed in one of the following | 
|---|
| 3625 | directories. | 
|---|
| 3626 |  | 
|---|
| 3627 | `bindir' | 
|---|
| 3628 | The directory for installing executable programs that users can | 
|---|
| 3629 | run.  This should normally be `/usr/local/bin', but write it as | 
|---|
| 3630 | `$(exec_prefix)/bin'.  (If you are using Autoconf, write it as | 
|---|
| 3631 | `@bindir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3632 |  | 
|---|
| 3633 | `sbindir' | 
|---|
| 3634 | The directory for installing executable programs that can be run | 
|---|
| 3635 | from the shell, but are only generally useful to system | 
|---|
| 3636 | administrators.  This should normally be `/usr/local/sbin', but | 
|---|
| 3637 | write it as `$(exec_prefix)/sbin'.  (If you are using Autoconf, | 
|---|
| 3638 | write it as `@sbindir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3639 |  | 
|---|
| 3640 | `libexecdir' | 
|---|
| 3641 | The directory for installing executable programs to be run by other | 
|---|
| 3642 | programs rather than by users.  This directory should normally be | 
|---|
| 3643 | `/usr/local/libexec', but write it as `$(exec_prefix)/libexec'. | 
|---|
| 3644 | (If you are using Autoconf, write it as `@libexecdir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3645 |  | 
|---|
| 3646 | Data files used by the program during its execution are divided into | 
|---|
| 3647 | categories in two ways. | 
|---|
| 3648 |  | 
|---|
| 3649 | * Some files are normally modified by programs; others are never | 
|---|
| 3650 | normally modified (though users may edit some of these). | 
|---|
| 3651 |  | 
|---|
| 3652 | * Some files are architecture-independent and can be shared by all | 
|---|
| 3653 | machines at a site; some are architecture-dependent and can be | 
|---|
| 3654 | shared only by machines of the same kind and operating system; | 
|---|
| 3655 | others may never be shared between two machines. | 
|---|
| 3656 |  | 
|---|
| 3657 | This makes for six different possibilities.  However, we want to | 
|---|
| 3658 | discourage the use of architecture-dependent files, aside from object | 
|---|
| 3659 | files and libraries.  It is much cleaner to make other data files | 
|---|
| 3660 | architecture-independent, and it is generally not hard. | 
|---|
| 3661 |  | 
|---|
| 3662 | Therefore, here are the variables Makefiles should use to specify | 
|---|
| 3663 | directories: | 
|---|
| 3664 |  | 
|---|
| 3665 | `datadir' | 
|---|
| 3666 | The directory for installing read-only architecture independent | 
|---|
| 3667 | data files.  This should normally be `/usr/local/share', but write | 
|---|
| 3668 | it as `$(prefix)/share'.  (If you are using Autoconf, write it as | 
|---|
| 3669 | `@datadir@'.)  As a special exception, see `$(infodir)' and | 
|---|
| 3670 | `$(includedir)' below. | 
|---|
| 3671 |  | 
|---|
| 3672 | `sysconfdir' | 
|---|
| 3673 | The directory for installing read-only data files that pertain to a | 
|---|
| 3674 | single machine-that is to say, files for configuring a host. | 
|---|
| 3675 | Mailer and network configuration files, `/etc/passwd', and so | 
|---|
| 3676 | forth belong here.  All the files in this directory should be | 
|---|
| 3677 | ordinary ASCII text files.  This directory should normally be | 
|---|
| 3678 | `/usr/local/etc', but write it as `$(prefix)/etc'.  (If you are | 
|---|
| 3679 | using Autoconf, write it as `@sysconfdir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3680 |  | 
|---|
| 3681 | Do not install executables here in this directory (they probably | 
|---|
| 3682 | belong in `$(libexecdir)' or `$(sbindir)').  Also do not install | 
|---|
| 3683 | files that are modified in the normal course of their use (programs | 
|---|
| 3684 | whose purpose is to change the configuration of the system | 
|---|
| 3685 | excluded).  Those probably belong in `$(localstatedir)'. | 
|---|
| 3686 |  | 
|---|
| 3687 | `sharedstatedir' | 
|---|
| 3688 | The directory for installing architecture-independent data files | 
|---|
| 3689 | which the programs modify while they run.  This should normally be | 
|---|
| 3690 | `/usr/local/com', but write it as `$(prefix)/com'.  (If you are | 
|---|
| 3691 | using Autoconf, write it as `@sharedstatedir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3692 |  | 
|---|
| 3693 | `localstatedir' | 
|---|
| 3694 | The directory for installing data files which the programs modify | 
|---|
| 3695 | while they run, and that pertain to one specific machine.  Users | 
|---|
| 3696 | should never need to modify files in this directory to configure | 
|---|
| 3697 | the package's operation; put such configuration information in | 
|---|
| 3698 | separate files that go in `$(datadir)' or `$(sysconfdir)'. | 
|---|
| 3699 | `$(localstatedir)' should normally be `/usr/local/var', but write | 
|---|
| 3700 | it as `$(prefix)/var'.  (If you are using Autoconf, write it as | 
|---|
| 3701 | `@localstatedir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3702 |  | 
|---|
| 3703 | `libdir' | 
|---|
| 3704 | The directory for object files and libraries of object code.  Do | 
|---|
| 3705 | not install executables here, they probably ought to go in | 
|---|
| 3706 | `$(libexecdir)' instead.  The value of `libdir' should normally be | 
|---|
| 3707 | `/usr/local/lib', but write it as `$(exec_prefix)/lib'.  (If you | 
|---|
| 3708 | are using Autoconf, write it as `@libdir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3709 |  | 
|---|
| 3710 | `infodir' | 
|---|
| 3711 | The directory for installing the Info files for this package.  By | 
|---|
| 3712 | default, it should be `/usr/local/info', but it should be written | 
|---|
| 3713 | as `$(prefix)/info'.  (If you are using Autoconf, write it as | 
|---|
| 3714 | `@infodir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3715 |  | 
|---|
| 3716 | `lispdir' | 
|---|
| 3717 | The directory for installing any Emacs Lisp files in this package. | 
|---|
| 3718 | By default, it should be `/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp', but | 
|---|
| 3719 | it should be written as `$(prefix)/share/emacs/site-lisp'. | 
|---|
| 3720 |  | 
|---|
| 3721 | If you are using Autoconf, write the default as `@lispdir@'.  In | 
|---|
| 3722 | order to make `@lispdir@' work, you need the following lines in | 
|---|
| 3723 | your `configure.in' file: | 
|---|
| 3724 |  | 
|---|
| 3725 | lispdir='${datadir}/emacs/site-lisp' | 
|---|
| 3726 | AC_SUBST(lispdir) | 
|---|
| 3727 |  | 
|---|
| 3728 | `includedir' | 
|---|
| 3729 | The directory for installing header files to be included by user | 
|---|
| 3730 | programs with the C `#include' preprocessor directive.  This | 
|---|
| 3731 | should normally be `/usr/local/include', but write it as | 
|---|
| 3732 | `$(prefix)/include'.  (If you are using Autoconf, write it as | 
|---|
| 3733 | `@includedir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3734 |  | 
|---|
| 3735 | Most compilers other than GCC do not look for header files in | 
|---|
| 3736 | directory `/usr/local/include'.  So installing the header files | 
|---|
| 3737 | this way is only useful with GCC.  Sometimes this is not a problem | 
|---|
| 3738 | because some libraries are only really intended to work with GCC. | 
|---|
| 3739 | But some libraries are intended to work with other compilers. | 
|---|
| 3740 | They should install their header files in two places, one | 
|---|
| 3741 | specified by `includedir' and one specified by `oldincludedir'. | 
|---|
| 3742 |  | 
|---|
| 3743 | `oldincludedir' | 
|---|
| 3744 | The directory for installing `#include' header files for use with | 
|---|
| 3745 | compilers other than GCC.  This should normally be `/usr/include'. | 
|---|
| 3746 | (If you are using Autoconf, you can write it as `@oldincludedir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3747 |  | 
|---|
| 3748 | The Makefile commands should check whether the value of | 
|---|
| 3749 | `oldincludedir' is empty.  If it is, they should not try to use | 
|---|
| 3750 | it; they should cancel the second installation of the header files. | 
|---|
| 3751 |  | 
|---|
| 3752 | A package should not replace an existing header in this directory | 
|---|
| 3753 | unless the header came from the same package.  Thus, if your Foo | 
|---|
| 3754 | package provides a header file `foo.h', then it should install the | 
|---|
| 3755 | header file in the `oldincludedir' directory if either (1) there | 
|---|
| 3756 | is no `foo.h' there or (2) the `foo.h' that exists came from the | 
|---|
| 3757 | Foo package. | 
|---|
| 3758 |  | 
|---|
| 3759 | To tell whether `foo.h' came from the Foo package, put a magic | 
|---|
| 3760 | string in the file--part of a comment--and `grep' for that string. | 
|---|
| 3761 |  | 
|---|
| 3762 | Unix-style man pages are installed in one of the following: | 
|---|
| 3763 |  | 
|---|
| 3764 | `mandir' | 
|---|
| 3765 | The top-level directory for installing the man pages (if any) for | 
|---|
| 3766 | this package.  It will normally be `/usr/local/man', but you should | 
|---|
| 3767 | write it as `$(prefix)/man'.  (If you are using Autoconf, write it | 
|---|
| 3768 | as `@mandir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3769 |  | 
|---|
| 3770 | `man1dir' | 
|---|
| 3771 | The directory for installing section 1 man pages.  Write it as | 
|---|
| 3772 | `$(mandir)/man1'. | 
|---|
| 3773 |  | 
|---|
| 3774 | `man2dir' | 
|---|
| 3775 | The directory for installing section 2 man pages.  Write it as | 
|---|
| 3776 | `$(mandir)/man2' | 
|---|
| 3777 |  | 
|---|
| 3778 | `...' | 
|---|
| 3779 | *Don't make the primary documentation for any GNU software be a | 
|---|
| 3780 | man page.  Write a manual in Texinfo instead.  Man pages are just | 
|---|
| 3781 | for the sake of people running GNU software on Unix, which is a | 
|---|
| 3782 | secondary application only.* | 
|---|
| 3783 |  | 
|---|
| 3784 | `manext' | 
|---|
| 3785 | The file name extension for the installed man page.  This should | 
|---|
| 3786 | contain a period followed by the appropriate digit; it should | 
|---|
| 3787 | normally be `.1'. | 
|---|
| 3788 |  | 
|---|
| 3789 | `man1ext' | 
|---|
| 3790 | The file name extension for installed section 1 man pages. | 
|---|
| 3791 |  | 
|---|
| 3792 | `man2ext' | 
|---|
| 3793 | The file name extension for installed section 2 man pages. | 
|---|
| 3794 |  | 
|---|
| 3795 | `...' | 
|---|
| 3796 | Use these names instead of `manext' if the package needs to | 
|---|
| 3797 | install man pages in more than one section of the manual. | 
|---|
| 3798 |  | 
|---|
| 3799 | And finally, you should set the following variable: | 
|---|
| 3800 |  | 
|---|
| 3801 | `srcdir' | 
|---|
| 3802 | The directory for the sources being compiled.  The value of this | 
|---|
| 3803 | variable is normally inserted by the `configure' shell script. | 
|---|
| 3804 | (If you are using Autconf, use `srcdir = @srcdir@'.) | 
|---|
| 3805 |  | 
|---|
| 3806 | For example: | 
|---|
| 3807 |  | 
|---|
| 3808 | # Common prefix for installation directories. | 
|---|
| 3809 | # NOTE: This directory must exist when you start the install. | 
|---|
| 3810 | prefix = /usr/local | 
|---|
| 3811 | exec_prefix = $(prefix) | 
|---|
| 3812 | # Where to put the executable for the command `gcc'. | 
|---|
| 3813 | bindir = $(exec_prefix)/bin | 
|---|
| 3814 | # Where to put the directories used by the compiler. | 
|---|
| 3815 | libexecdir = $(exec_prefix)/libexec | 
|---|
| 3816 | # Where to put the Info files. | 
|---|
| 3817 | infodir = $(prefix)/info | 
|---|
| 3818 |  | 
|---|
| 3819 | If your program installs a large number of files into one of the | 
|---|
| 3820 | standard user-specified directories, it might be useful to group them | 
|---|
| 3821 | into a subdirectory particular to that program.  If you do this, you | 
|---|
| 3822 | should write the `install' rule to create these subdirectories. | 
|---|
| 3823 |  | 
|---|
| 3824 | Do not expect the user to include the subdirectory name in the value | 
|---|
| 3825 | of any of the variables listed above.  The idea of having a uniform set | 
|---|
| 3826 | of variable names for installation directories is to enable the user to | 
|---|
| 3827 | specify the exact same values for several different GNU packages.  In | 
|---|
| 3828 | order for this to be useful, all the packages must be designed so that | 
|---|
| 3829 | they will work sensibly when the user does so. | 
|---|
| 3830 |  | 
|---|
| 3831 |  | 
|---|
| 3832 | File: standards.info,  Node: Standard Targets,  Next: Install Command Categories,  Prev: Directory Variables,  Up: Makefile Conventions | 
|---|
| 3833 |  | 
|---|
| 3834 | Standard Targets for Users | 
|---|
| 3835 | -------------------------- | 
|---|
| 3836 |  | 
|---|
| 3837 | All GNU programs should have the following targets in their | 
|---|
| 3838 | Makefiles: | 
|---|
| 3839 |  | 
|---|
| 3840 | `all' | 
|---|
| 3841 | Compile the entire program.  This should be the default target. | 
|---|
| 3842 | This target need not rebuild any documentation files; Info files | 
|---|
| 3843 | should normally be included in the distribution, and DVI files | 
|---|
| 3844 | should be made only when explicitly asked for. | 
|---|
| 3845 |  | 
|---|
| 3846 | By default, the Make rules should compile and link with `-g', so | 
|---|
| 3847 | that executable programs have debugging symbols.  Users who don't | 
|---|
| 3848 | mind being helpless can strip the executables later if they wish. | 
|---|
| 3849 |  | 
|---|
| 3850 | `install' | 
|---|
| 3851 | Compile the program and copy the executables, libraries, and so on | 
|---|
| 3852 | to the file names where they should reside for actual use.  If | 
|---|
| 3853 | there is a simple test to verify that a program is properly | 
|---|
| 3854 | installed, this target should run that test. | 
|---|
| 3855 |  | 
|---|
| 3856 | Do not strip executables when installing them.  Devil-may-care | 
|---|
| 3857 | users can use the `install-strip' target to do that. | 
|---|
| 3858 |  | 
|---|
| 3859 | If possible, write the `install' target rule so that it does not | 
|---|
| 3860 | modify anything in the directory where the program was built, | 
|---|
| 3861 | provided `make all' has just been done.  This is convenient for | 
|---|
| 3862 | building the program under one user name and installing it under | 
|---|
| 3863 | another. | 
|---|
| 3864 |  | 
|---|
| 3865 | The commands should create all the directories in which files are | 
|---|
| 3866 | to be installed, if they don't already exist.  This includes the | 
|---|
| 3867 | directories specified as the values of the variables `prefix' and | 
|---|
| 3868 | `exec_prefix', as well as all subdirectories that are needed.  One | 
|---|
| 3869 | way to do this is by means of an `installdirs' target as described | 
|---|
| 3870 | below. | 
|---|
| 3871 |  | 
|---|
| 3872 | Use `-' before any command for installing a man page, so that | 
|---|
| 3873 | `make' will ignore any errors.  This is in case there are systems | 
|---|
| 3874 | that don't have the Unix man page documentation system installed. | 
|---|
| 3875 |  | 
|---|
| 3876 | The way to install Info files is to copy them into `$(infodir)' | 
|---|
| 3877 | with `$(INSTALL_DATA)' (*note Command Variables::), and then run | 
|---|
| 3878 | the `install-info' program if it is present.  `install-info' is a | 
|---|
| 3879 | program that edits the Info `dir' file to add or update the menu | 
|---|
| 3880 | entry for the given Info file; it is part of the Texinfo package. | 
|---|
| 3881 | Here is a sample rule to install an Info file: | 
|---|
| 3882 |  | 
|---|
| 3883 | $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/foo.info: foo.info | 
|---|
| 3884 | $(POST_INSTALL) | 
|---|
| 3885 | # There may be a newer info file in . than in srcdir. | 
|---|
| 3886 | -if test -f foo.info; then d=.; \ | 
|---|
| 3887 | else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ | 
|---|
| 3888 | $(INSTALL_DATA) $$d/foo.info $(DESTDIR)$@; \ | 
|---|
| 3889 | # Run install-info only if it exists. | 
|---|
| 3890 | # Use `if' instead of just prepending `-' to the | 
|---|
| 3891 | # line so we notice real errors from install-info. | 
|---|
| 3892 | # We use `$(SHELL) -c' because some shells do not | 
|---|
| 3893 | # fail gracefully when there is an unknown command. | 
|---|
| 3894 | if $(SHELL) -c 'install-info --version' \ | 
|---|
| 3895 | >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ | 
|---|
| 3896 | install-info --dir-file=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/dir \ | 
|---|
| 3897 | $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/foo.info; \ | 
|---|
| 3898 | else true; fi | 
|---|
| 3899 |  | 
|---|
| 3900 | When writing the `install' target, you must classify all the | 
|---|
| 3901 | commands into three categories: normal ones, "pre-installation" | 
|---|
| 3902 | commands and "post-installation" commands.  *Note Install Command | 
|---|
| 3903 | Categories::. | 
|---|
| 3904 |  | 
|---|
| 3905 | `uninstall' | 
|---|
| 3906 | Delete all the installed files--the copies that the `install' | 
|---|
| 3907 | target creates. | 
|---|
| 3908 |  | 
|---|
| 3909 | This rule should not modify the directories where compilation is | 
|---|
| 3910 | done, only the directories where files are installed. | 
|---|
| 3911 |  | 
|---|
| 3912 | The uninstallation commands are divided into three categories, | 
|---|
| 3913 | just like the installation commands.  *Note Install Command | 
|---|
| 3914 | Categories::. | 
|---|
| 3915 |  | 
|---|
| 3916 | `install-strip' | 
|---|
| 3917 | Like `install', but strip the executable files while installing | 
|---|
| 3918 | them.  In simple cases, this target can use the `install' target in | 
|---|
| 3919 | a simple way: | 
|---|
| 3920 |  | 
|---|
| 3921 | install-strip: | 
|---|
| 3922 | $(MAKE) INSTALL_PROGRAM='$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) -s' \ | 
|---|
| 3923 | install | 
|---|
| 3924 |  | 
|---|
| 3925 | But if the package installs scripts as well as real executables, | 
|---|
| 3926 | the `install-strip' target can't just refer to the `install' | 
|---|
| 3927 | target; it has to strip the executables but not the scripts. | 
|---|
| 3928 |  | 
|---|
| 3929 | `install-strip' should not strip the executables in the build | 
|---|
| 3930 | directory which are being copied for installation.  It should only | 
|---|
| 3931 | strip the copies that are installed. | 
|---|
| 3932 |  | 
|---|
| 3933 | Normally we do not recommend stripping an executable unless you | 
|---|
| 3934 | are sure the program has no bugs.  However, it can be reasonable | 
|---|
| 3935 | to install a stripped executable for actual execution while saving | 
|---|
| 3936 | the unstripped executable elsewhere in case there is a bug. | 
|---|
| 3937 |  | 
|---|
| 3938 | `clean' | 
|---|
| 3939 | Delete all files from the current directory that are normally | 
|---|
| 3940 | created by building the program.  Don't delete the files that | 
|---|
| 3941 | record the configuration.  Also preserve files that could be made | 
|---|
| 3942 | by building, but normally aren't because the distribution comes | 
|---|
| 3943 | with them. | 
|---|
| 3944 |  | 
|---|
| 3945 | Delete `.dvi' files here if they are not part of the distribution. | 
|---|
| 3946 |  | 
|---|
| 3947 | `distclean' | 
|---|
| 3948 | Delete all files from the current directory that are created by | 
|---|
| 3949 | configuring or building the program.  If you have unpacked the | 
|---|
| 3950 | source and built the program without creating any other files, | 
|---|
| 3951 | `make distclean' should leave only the files that were in the | 
|---|
| 3952 | distribution. | 
|---|
| 3953 |  | 
|---|
| 3954 | `mostlyclean' | 
|---|
| 3955 | Like `clean', but may refrain from deleting a few files that people | 
|---|
| 3956 | normally don't want to recompile.  For example, the `mostlyclean' | 
|---|
| 3957 | target for GCC does not delete `libgcc.a', because recompiling it | 
|---|
| 3958 | is rarely necessary and takes a lot of time. | 
|---|
| 3959 |  | 
|---|
| 3960 | `maintainer-clean' | 
|---|
| 3961 | Delete almost everything from the current directory that can be | 
|---|
| 3962 | reconstructed with this Makefile.  This typically includes | 
|---|
| 3963 | everything deleted by `distclean', plus more: C source files | 
|---|
| 3964 | produced by Bison, tags tables, Info files, and so on. | 
|---|
| 3965 |  | 
|---|
| 3966 | The reason we say "almost everything" is that running the command | 
|---|
| 3967 | `make maintainer-clean' should not delete `configure' even if | 
|---|
| 3968 | `configure' can be remade using a rule in the Makefile.  More | 
|---|
| 3969 | generally, `make maintainer-clean' should not delete anything that | 
|---|
| 3970 | needs to exist in order to run `configure' and then begin to build | 
|---|
| 3971 | the program.  This is the only exception; `maintainer-clean' should | 
|---|
| 3972 | delete everything else that can be rebuilt. | 
|---|
| 3973 |  | 
|---|
| 3974 | The `maintainer-clean' target is intended to be used by a | 
|---|
| 3975 | maintainer of the package, not by ordinary users.  You may need | 
|---|
| 3976 | special tools to reconstruct some of the files that `make | 
|---|
| 3977 | maintainer-clean' deletes.  Since these files are normally | 
|---|
| 3978 | included in the distribution, we don't take care to make them easy | 
|---|
| 3979 | to reconstruct.  If you find you need to unpack the full | 
|---|
| 3980 | distribution again, don't blame us. | 
|---|
| 3981 |  | 
|---|
| 3982 | To help make users aware of this, the commands for the special | 
|---|
| 3983 | `maintainer-clean' target should start with these two: | 
|---|
| 3984 |  | 
|---|
| 3985 | @echo 'This command is intended for maintainers to use; it' | 
|---|
| 3986 | @echo 'deletes files that may need special tools to rebuild.' | 
|---|
| 3987 |  | 
|---|
| 3988 | `TAGS' | 
|---|
| 3989 | Update a tags table for this program. | 
|---|
| 3990 |  | 
|---|
| 3991 | `info' | 
|---|
| 3992 | Generate any Info files needed.  The best way to write the rules | 
|---|
| 3993 | is as follows: | 
|---|
| 3994 |  | 
|---|
| 3995 | info: foo.info | 
|---|
| 3996 |  | 
|---|
| 3997 | foo.info: foo.texi chap1.texi chap2.texi | 
|---|
| 3998 | $(MAKEINFO) $(srcdir)/foo.texi | 
|---|
| 3999 |  | 
|---|
| 4000 | You must define the variable `MAKEINFO' in the Makefile.  It should | 
|---|
| 4001 | run the `makeinfo' program, which is part of the Texinfo | 
|---|
| 4002 | distribution. | 
|---|
| 4003 |  | 
|---|
| 4004 | Normally a GNU distribution comes with Info files, and that means | 
|---|
| 4005 | the Info files are present in the source directory.  Therefore, | 
|---|
| 4006 | the Make rule for an info file should update it in the source | 
|---|
| 4007 | directory.  When users build the package, ordinarily Make will not | 
|---|
| 4008 | update the Info files because they will already be up to date. | 
|---|
| 4009 |  | 
|---|
| 4010 | `dvi' | 
|---|
| 4011 | Generate DVI files for all Texinfo documentation.  For example: | 
|---|
| 4012 |  | 
|---|
| 4013 | dvi: foo.dvi | 
|---|
| 4014 |  | 
|---|
| 4015 | foo.dvi: foo.texi chap1.texi chap2.texi | 
|---|
| 4016 | $(TEXI2DVI) $(srcdir)/foo.texi | 
|---|
| 4017 |  | 
|---|
| 4018 | You must define the variable `TEXI2DVI' in the Makefile.  It should | 
|---|
| 4019 | run the program `texi2dvi', which is part of the Texinfo | 
|---|
| 4020 | distribution.(1)  Alternatively, write just the dependencies, and | 
|---|
| 4021 | allow GNU `make' to provide the command. | 
|---|
| 4022 |  | 
|---|
| 4023 | `dist' | 
|---|
| 4024 | Create a distribution tar file for this program.  The tar file | 
|---|
| 4025 | should be set up so that the file names in the tar file start with | 
|---|
| 4026 | a subdirectory name which is the name of the package it is a | 
|---|
| 4027 | distribution for.  This name can include the version number. | 
|---|
| 4028 |  | 
|---|
| 4029 | For example, the distribution tar file of GCC version 1.40 unpacks | 
|---|
| 4030 | into a subdirectory named `gcc-1.40'. | 
|---|
| 4031 |  | 
|---|
| 4032 | The easiest way to do this is to create a subdirectory | 
|---|
| 4033 | appropriately named, use `ln' or `cp' to install the proper files | 
|---|
| 4034 | in it, and then `tar' that subdirectory. | 
|---|
| 4035 |  | 
|---|
| 4036 | Compress the tar file with `gzip'.  For example, the actual | 
|---|
| 4037 | distribution file for GCC version 1.40 is called `gcc-1.40.tar.gz'. | 
|---|
| 4038 |  | 
|---|
| 4039 | The `dist' target should explicitly depend on all non-source files | 
|---|
| 4040 | that are in the distribution, to make sure they are up to date in | 
|---|
| 4041 | the distribution.  *Note Making Releases: Releases. | 
|---|
| 4042 |  | 
|---|
| 4043 | `check' | 
|---|
| 4044 | Perform self-tests (if any).  The user must build the program | 
|---|
| 4045 | before running the tests, but need not install the program; you | 
|---|
| 4046 | should write the self-tests so that they work when the program is | 
|---|
| 4047 | built but not installed. | 
|---|
| 4048 |  | 
|---|
| 4049 | The following targets are suggested as conventional names, for | 
|---|
| 4050 | programs in which they are useful. | 
|---|
| 4051 |  | 
|---|
| 4052 | `installcheck' | 
|---|
| 4053 | Perform installation tests (if any).  The user must build and | 
|---|
| 4054 | install the program before running the tests.  You should not | 
|---|
| 4055 | assume that `$(bindir)' is in the search path. | 
|---|
| 4056 |  | 
|---|
| 4057 | `installdirs' | 
|---|
| 4058 | It's useful to add a target named `installdirs' to create the | 
|---|
| 4059 | directories where files are installed, and their parent | 
|---|
| 4060 | directories.  There is a script called `mkinstalldirs' which is | 
|---|
| 4061 | convenient for this; you can find it in the Texinfo package.  You | 
|---|
| 4062 | can use a rule like this: | 
|---|
| 4063 |  | 
|---|
| 4064 | # Make sure all installation directories (e.g. $(bindir)) | 
|---|
| 4065 | # actually exist by making them if necessary. | 
|---|
| 4066 | installdirs: mkinstalldirs | 
|---|
| 4067 | $(srcdir)/mkinstalldirs $(bindir) $(datadir) \ | 
|---|
| 4068 | $(libdir) $(infodir) \ | 
|---|
| 4069 | $(mandir) | 
|---|
| 4070 |  | 
|---|
| 4071 | or, if you wish to support `DESTDIR', | 
|---|
| 4072 |  | 
|---|
| 4073 | # Make sure all installation directories (e.g. $(bindir)) | 
|---|
| 4074 | # actually exist by making them if necessary. | 
|---|
| 4075 | installdirs: mkinstalldirs | 
|---|
| 4076 | $(srcdir)/mkinstalldirs \ | 
|---|
| 4077 | $(DESTDIR)$(bindir) $(DESTDIR)$(datadir) \ | 
|---|
| 4078 | $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir) \ | 
|---|
| 4079 | $(DESTDIR)$(mandir) | 
|---|
| 4080 |  | 
|---|
| 4081 | This rule should not modify the directories where compilation is | 
|---|
| 4082 | done.  It should do nothing but create installation directories. | 
|---|
| 4083 |  | 
|---|
| 4084 | ---------- Footnotes ---------- | 
|---|
| 4085 |  | 
|---|
| 4086 | (1) `texi2dvi' uses TeX to do the real work of formatting. TeX is | 
|---|
| 4087 | not distributed with Texinfo. | 
|---|
| 4088 |  | 
|---|
| 4089 |  | 
|---|
| 4090 | File: standards.info,  Node: Install Command Categories,  Prev: Standard Targets,  Up: Makefile Conventions | 
|---|
| 4091 |  | 
|---|
| 4092 | Install Command Categories | 
|---|
| 4093 | -------------------------- | 
|---|
| 4094 |  | 
|---|
| 4095 | When writing the `install' target, you must classify all the | 
|---|
| 4096 | commands into three categories: normal ones, "pre-installation" | 
|---|
| 4097 | commands and "post-installation" commands. | 
|---|
| 4098 |  | 
|---|
| 4099 | Normal commands move files into their proper places, and set their | 
|---|
| 4100 | modes.  They may not alter any files except the ones that come entirely | 
|---|
| 4101 | from the package they belong to. | 
|---|
| 4102 |  | 
|---|
| 4103 | Pre-installation and post-installation commands may alter other | 
|---|
| 4104 | files; in particular, they can edit global configuration files or data | 
|---|
| 4105 | bases. | 
|---|
| 4106 |  | 
|---|
| 4107 | Pre-installation commands are typically executed before the normal | 
|---|
| 4108 | commands, and post-installation commands are typically run after the | 
|---|
| 4109 | normal commands. | 
|---|
| 4110 |  | 
|---|
| 4111 | The most common use for a post-installation command is to run | 
|---|
| 4112 | `install-info'.  This cannot be done with a normal command, since it | 
|---|
| 4113 | alters a file (the Info directory) which does not come entirely and | 
|---|
| 4114 | solely from the package being installed.  It is a post-installation | 
|---|
| 4115 | command because it needs to be done after the normal command which | 
|---|
| 4116 | installs the package's Info files. | 
|---|
| 4117 |  | 
|---|
| 4118 | Most programs don't need any pre-installation commands, but we have | 
|---|
| 4119 | the feature just in case it is needed. | 
|---|
| 4120 |  | 
|---|
| 4121 | To classify the commands in the `install' rule into these three | 
|---|
| 4122 | categories, insert "category lines" among them.  A category line | 
|---|
| 4123 | specifies the category for the commands that follow. | 
|---|
| 4124 |  | 
|---|
| 4125 | A category line consists of a tab and a reference to a special Make | 
|---|
| 4126 | variable, plus an optional comment at the end.  There are three | 
|---|
| 4127 | variables you can use, one for each category; the variable name | 
|---|
| 4128 | specifies the category.  Category lines are no-ops in ordinary execution | 
|---|
| 4129 | because these three Make variables are normally undefined (and you | 
|---|
| 4130 | _should not_ define them in the makefile). | 
|---|
| 4131 |  | 
|---|
| 4132 | Here are the three possible category lines, each with a comment that | 
|---|
| 4133 | explains what it means: | 
|---|
| 4134 |  | 
|---|
| 4135 | $(PRE_INSTALL)     # Pre-install commands follow. | 
|---|
| 4136 | $(POST_INSTALL)    # Post-install commands follow. | 
|---|
| 4137 | $(NORMAL_INSTALL)  # Normal commands follow. | 
|---|
| 4138 |  | 
|---|
| 4139 | If you don't use a category line at the beginning of the `install' | 
|---|
| 4140 | rule, all the commands are classified as normal until the first category | 
|---|
| 4141 | line.  If you don't use any category lines, all the commands are | 
|---|
| 4142 | classified as normal. | 
|---|
| 4143 |  | 
|---|
| 4144 | These are the category lines for `uninstall': | 
|---|
| 4145 |  | 
|---|
| 4146 | $(PRE_UNINSTALL)     # Pre-uninstall commands follow. | 
|---|
| 4147 | $(POST_UNINSTALL)    # Post-uninstall commands follow. | 
|---|
| 4148 | $(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)  # Normal commands follow. | 
|---|
| 4149 |  | 
|---|
| 4150 | Typically, a pre-uninstall command would be used for deleting entries | 
|---|
| 4151 | from the Info directory. | 
|---|
| 4152 |  | 
|---|
| 4153 | If the `install' or `uninstall' target has any dependencies which | 
|---|
| 4154 | act as subroutines of installation, then you should start _each_ | 
|---|
| 4155 | dependency's commands with a category line, and start the main target's | 
|---|
| 4156 | commands with a category line also.  This way, you can ensure that each | 
|---|
| 4157 | command is placed in the right category regardless of which of the | 
|---|
| 4158 | dependencies actually run. | 
|---|
| 4159 |  | 
|---|
| 4160 | Pre-installation and post-installation commands should not run any | 
|---|
| 4161 | programs except for these: | 
|---|
| 4162 |  | 
|---|
| 4163 | [ basename bash cat chgrp chmod chown cmp cp dd diff echo | 
|---|
| 4164 | egrep expand expr false fgrep find getopt grep gunzip gzip | 
|---|
| 4165 | hostname install install-info kill ldconfig ln ls md5sum | 
|---|
| 4166 | mkdir mkfifo mknod mv printenv pwd rm rmdir sed sort tee | 
|---|
| 4167 | test touch true uname xargs yes | 
|---|
| 4168 |  | 
|---|
| 4169 | The reason for distinguishing the commands in this way is for the | 
|---|
| 4170 | sake of making binary packages.  Typically a binary package contains | 
|---|
| 4171 | all the executables and other files that need to be installed, and has | 
|---|
| 4172 | its own method of installing them--so it does not need to run the normal | 
|---|
| 4173 | installation commands.  But installing the binary package does need to | 
|---|
| 4174 | execute the pre-installation and post-installation commands. | 
|---|
| 4175 |  | 
|---|
| 4176 | Programs to build binary packages work by extracting the | 
|---|
| 4177 | pre-installation and post-installation commands.  Here is one way of | 
|---|
| 4178 | extracting the pre-installation commands: | 
|---|
| 4179 |  | 
|---|
| 4180 | make -n install -o all \ | 
|---|
| 4181 | PRE_INSTALL=pre-install \ | 
|---|
| 4182 | POST_INSTALL=post-install \ | 
|---|
| 4183 | NORMAL_INSTALL=normal-install \ | 
|---|
| 4184 | | gawk -f pre-install.awk | 
|---|
| 4185 |  | 
|---|
| 4186 | where the file `pre-install.awk' could contain this: | 
|---|
| 4187 |  | 
|---|
| 4188 | $0 ~ /^\t[ \t]*(normal_install|post_install)[ \t]*$/ {on = 0} | 
|---|
| 4189 | on {print $0} | 
|---|
| 4190 | $0 ~ /^\t[ \t]*pre_install[ \t]*$/ {on = 1} | 
|---|
| 4191 |  | 
|---|
| 4192 | The resulting file of pre-installation commands is executed as a | 
|---|
| 4193 | shell script as part of installing the binary package. | 
|---|
| 4194 |  | 
|---|
| 4195 |  | 
|---|
| 4196 | File: standards.info,  Node: Releases,  Prev: Makefile Conventions,  Up: Managing Releases | 
|---|
| 4197 |  | 
|---|
| 4198 | Making Releases | 
|---|
| 4199 | =============== | 
|---|
| 4200 |  | 
|---|
| 4201 | Package the distribution of `Foo version 69.96' up in a gzipped tar | 
|---|
| 4202 | file with the name `foo-69.96.tar.gz'.  It should unpack into a | 
|---|
| 4203 | subdirectory named `foo-69.96'. | 
|---|
| 4204 |  | 
|---|
| 4205 | Building and installing the program should never modify any of the | 
|---|
| 4206 | files contained in the distribution.  This means that all the files | 
|---|
| 4207 | that form part of the program in any way must be classified into "source | 
|---|
| 4208 | files" and "non-source files".  Source files are written by humans and | 
|---|
| 4209 | never changed automatically; non-source files are produced from source | 
|---|
| 4210 | files by programs under the control of the Makefile. | 
|---|
| 4211 |  | 
|---|
| 4212 | The distribution should contain a file named `README' which gives | 
|---|
| 4213 | the name of the package, and a general description of what it does.  It | 
|---|
| 4214 | is also good to explain the purpose of each of the first-level | 
|---|
| 4215 | subdirectories in the package, if there are any.  The `README' file | 
|---|
| 4216 | should either state the version number of the package, or refer to where | 
|---|
| 4217 | in the package it can be found. | 
|---|
| 4218 |  | 
|---|
| 4219 | The `README' file should refer to the file `INSTALL', which should | 
|---|
| 4220 | contain an explanation of the installation procedure. | 
|---|
| 4221 |  | 
|---|
| 4222 | The `README' file should also refer to the file which contains the | 
|---|
| 4223 | copying conditions.  The GNU GPL, if used, should be in a file called | 
|---|
| 4224 | `COPYING'.  If the GNU LGPL is used, it should be in a file called | 
|---|
| 4225 | `COPYING.LIB'. | 
|---|
| 4226 |  | 
|---|
| 4227 | Naturally, all the source files must be in the distribution.  It is | 
|---|
| 4228 | okay to include non-source files in the distribution, provided they are | 
|---|
| 4229 | up-to-date and machine-independent, so that building the distribution | 
|---|
| 4230 | normally will never modify them.  We commonly include non-source files | 
|---|
| 4231 | produced by Bison, `lex', TeX, and `makeinfo'; this helps avoid | 
|---|
| 4232 | unnecessary dependencies between our distributions, so that users can | 
|---|
| 4233 | install whichever packages they want to install. | 
|---|
| 4234 |  | 
|---|
| 4235 | Non-source files that might actually be modified by building and | 
|---|
| 4236 | installing the program should *never* be included in the distribution. | 
|---|
| 4237 | So if you do distribute non-source files, always make sure they are up | 
|---|
| 4238 | to date when you make a new distribution. | 
|---|
| 4239 |  | 
|---|
| 4240 | Make sure that the directory into which the distribution unpacks (as | 
|---|
| 4241 | well as any subdirectories) are all world-writable (octal mode 777). | 
|---|
| 4242 | This is so that old versions of `tar' which preserve the ownership and | 
|---|
| 4243 | permissions of the files from the tar archive will be able to extract | 
|---|
| 4244 | all the files even if the user is unprivileged. | 
|---|
| 4245 |  | 
|---|
| 4246 | Make sure that all the files in the distribution are world-readable. | 
|---|
| 4247 |  | 
|---|
| 4248 | Make sure that no file name in the distribution is more than 14 | 
|---|
| 4249 | characters long.  Likewise, no file created by building the program | 
|---|
| 4250 | should have a name longer than 14 characters.  The reason for this is | 
|---|
| 4251 | that some systems adhere to a foolish interpretation of the POSIX | 
|---|
| 4252 | standard, and refuse to open a longer name, rather than truncating as | 
|---|
| 4253 | they did in the past. | 
|---|
| 4254 |  | 
|---|
| 4255 | Don't include any symbolic links in the distribution itself.  If the | 
|---|
| 4256 | tar file contains symbolic links, then people cannot even unpack it on | 
|---|
| 4257 | systems that don't support symbolic links.  Also, don't use multiple | 
|---|
| 4258 | names for one file in different directories, because certain file | 
|---|
| 4259 | systems cannot handle this and that prevents unpacking the distribution. | 
|---|
| 4260 |  | 
|---|
| 4261 | Try to make sure that all the file names will be unique on MS-DOS.  A | 
|---|
| 4262 | name on MS-DOS consists of up to 8 characters, optionally followed by a | 
|---|
| 4263 | period and up to three characters.  MS-DOS will truncate extra | 
|---|
| 4264 | characters both before and after the period.  Thus, `foobarhacker.c' | 
|---|
| 4265 | and `foobarhacker.o' are not ambiguous; they are truncated to | 
|---|
| 4266 | `foobarha.c' and `foobarha.o', which are distinct. | 
|---|
| 4267 |  | 
|---|
| 4268 | Include in your distribution a copy of the `texinfo.tex' you used to | 
|---|
| 4269 | test print any `*.texinfo' or `*.texi' files. | 
|---|
| 4270 |  | 
|---|
| 4271 | Likewise, if your program uses small GNU software packages like | 
|---|
| 4272 | regex, getopt, obstack, or termcap, include them in the distribution | 
|---|
| 4273 | file.  Leaving them out would make the distribution file a little | 
|---|
| 4274 | smaller at the expense of possible inconvenience to a user who doesn't | 
|---|
| 4275 | know what other files to get. | 
|---|
| 4276 |  | 
|---|
| 4277 |  | 
|---|
| 4278 | File: standards.info,  Node: References,  Next: Copying This Manual,  Prev: Managing Releases,  Up: Top | 
|---|
| 4279 |  | 
|---|
| 4280 | References to Non-Free Software and Documentation | 
|---|
| 4281 | ************************************************* | 
|---|
| 4282 |  | 
|---|
| 4283 | A GNU program should not recommend use of any non-free program.  We | 
|---|
| 4284 | can't stop some people from writing proprietary programs, or stop other | 
|---|
| 4285 | people from using them, but we can and should avoid helping to | 
|---|
| 4286 | advertise them to new potential customers.  Proprietary software is a | 
|---|
| 4287 | social and ethical problem, and the point of GNU is to solve that | 
|---|
| 4288 | problem. | 
|---|
| 4289 |  | 
|---|
| 4290 | When a non-free program or system is well known, you can mention it | 
|---|
| 4291 | in passing--that is harmless, since users who might want to use it | 
|---|
| 4292 | probably already know about it.  For instance, it is fine to explain | 
|---|
| 4293 | how to build your package on top of some non-free operating system, or | 
|---|
| 4294 | how to use it together with some widely used non-free program. | 
|---|
| 4295 |  | 
|---|
| 4296 | However, you should give only the necessary information to help those | 
|---|
| 4297 | who already use the non-free program to use your program with it--don't | 
|---|
| 4298 | give, or refer to, any further information about the proprietary | 
|---|
| 4299 | program, and don't imply that the proprietary program enhances your | 
|---|
| 4300 | program, or that its existence is in any way a good thing.  The goal | 
|---|
| 4301 | should be that people already using the proprietary program will get | 
|---|
| 4302 | the advice they need about how to use your free program, while people | 
|---|
| 4303 | who don't already use the proprietary program will not see anything to | 
|---|
| 4304 | lead them to take an interest in it. | 
|---|
| 4305 |  | 
|---|
| 4306 | If a non-free program or system is obscure in your program's domain, | 
|---|
| 4307 | your program should not mention or support it at all, since doing so | 
|---|
| 4308 | would tend to popularize the non-free program more than it popularizes | 
|---|
| 4309 | your program.  (You cannot hope to find many additional users among the | 
|---|
| 4310 | users of Foobar if the users of Foobar are few.) | 
|---|
| 4311 |  | 
|---|
| 4312 | A GNU package should not refer the user to any non-free documentation | 
|---|
| 4313 | for free software.  Free documentation that can be included in free | 
|---|
| 4314 | operating systems is essential for completing the GNU system, so it is | 
|---|
| 4315 | a major focus of the GNU Project; to recommend use of documentation | 
|---|
| 4316 | that we are not allowed to use in GNU would undermine the efforts to | 
|---|
| 4317 | get documentation that we can include.  So GNU packages should never | 
|---|
| 4318 | recommend non-free documentation. | 
|---|
| 4319 |  | 
|---|
| 4320 |  | 
|---|
| 4321 | File: standards.info,  Node: Copying This Manual,  Next: Index,  Prev: References,  Up: Top | 
|---|
| 4322 |  | 
|---|
| 4323 | Copying This Manual | 
|---|
| 4324 | ******************* | 
|---|
| 4325 |  | 
|---|
| 4326 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 4327 |  | 
|---|
| 4328 | * GNU Free Documentation License::  License for copying this manual | 
|---|
| 4329 |  | 
|---|
| 4330 |  | 
|---|
| 4331 | File: standards.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Copying This Manual | 
|---|
| 4332 |  | 
|---|
| 4333 | GNU Free Documentation License | 
|---|
| 4334 | ****************************** | 
|---|
| 4335 |  | 
|---|
| 4336 | Version 1.1, March 2000 | 
|---|
| 4337 | Copyright (C) 2000  Free Software Foundation, Inc. | 
|---|
| 4338 | 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA | 
|---|
| 4339 |  | 
|---|
| 4340 | Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies | 
|---|
| 4341 | of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. | 
|---|
| 4342 |  | 
|---|
| 4343 |  | 
|---|
| 4344 | 0. PREAMBLE | 
|---|
| 4345 |  | 
|---|
| 4346 | The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other | 
|---|
| 4347 | written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone | 
|---|
| 4348 | the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without | 
|---|
| 4349 | modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily, | 
|---|
| 4350 | this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get | 
|---|
| 4351 | credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for | 
|---|
| 4352 | modifications made by others. | 
|---|
| 4353 |  | 
|---|
| 4354 | This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative | 
|---|
| 4355 | works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. | 
|---|
| 4356 | It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft | 
|---|
| 4357 | license designed for free software. | 
|---|
| 4358 |  | 
|---|
| 4359 | We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for | 
|---|
| 4360 | free software, because free software needs free documentation: a | 
|---|
| 4361 | free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms | 
|---|
| 4362 | that the software does.  But this License is not limited to | 
|---|
| 4363 | software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless | 
|---|
| 4364 | of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. | 
|---|
| 4365 | We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is | 
|---|
| 4366 | instruction or reference. | 
|---|
| 4367 |  | 
|---|
| 4368 |  | 
|---|
| 4369 | 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS | 
|---|
| 4370 |  | 
|---|
| 4371 | This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a | 
|---|
| 4372 | notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed | 
|---|
| 4373 | under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to | 
|---|
| 4374 | any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee, | 
|---|
| 4375 | and is addressed as "you." | 
|---|
| 4376 |  | 
|---|
| 4377 | A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the | 
|---|
| 4378 | Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with | 
|---|
| 4379 | modifications and/or translated into another language. | 
|---|
| 4380 |  | 
|---|
| 4381 | A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter | 
|---|
| 4382 | section of the Document that deals exclusively with the | 
|---|
| 4383 | relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the | 
|---|
| 4384 | Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains | 
|---|
| 4385 | nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. | 
|---|
| 4386 | (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of | 
|---|
| 4387 | mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) | 
|---|
| 4388 | The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with | 
|---|
| 4389 | the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, | 
|---|
| 4390 | philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them. | 
|---|
| 4391 |  | 
|---|
| 4392 | The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose | 
|---|
| 4393 | titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in | 
|---|
| 4394 | the notice that says that the Document is released under this | 
|---|
| 4395 | License. | 
|---|
| 4396 |  | 
|---|
| 4397 | The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are | 
|---|
| 4398 | listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice | 
|---|
| 4399 | that says that the Document is released under this License. | 
|---|
| 4400 |  | 
|---|
| 4401 | A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, | 
|---|
| 4402 | represented in a format whose specification is available to the | 
|---|
| 4403 | general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly | 
|---|
| 4404 | and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images | 
|---|
| 4405 | composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some | 
|---|
| 4406 | widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to | 
|---|
| 4407 | text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of | 
|---|
| 4408 | formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an | 
|---|
| 4409 | otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed | 
|---|
| 4410 | to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not | 
|---|
| 4411 | Transparent.  A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque." | 
|---|
| 4412 |  | 
|---|
| 4413 | Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain | 
|---|
| 4414 | ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, | 
|---|
| 4415 | SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and | 
|---|
| 4416 | standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. | 
|---|
| 4417 | Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that | 
|---|
| 4418 | can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML | 
|---|
| 4419 | or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally | 
|---|
| 4420 | available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word | 
|---|
| 4421 | processors for output purposes only. | 
|---|
| 4422 |  | 
|---|
| 4423 | The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself, | 
|---|
| 4424 | plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the | 
|---|
| 4425 | material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For | 
|---|
| 4426 | works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title | 
|---|
| 4427 | Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the | 
|---|
| 4428 | work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text. | 
|---|
| 4429 |  | 
|---|
| 4430 | 2. VERBATIM COPYING | 
|---|
| 4431 |  | 
|---|
| 4432 | You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either | 
|---|
| 4433 | commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the | 
|---|
| 4434 | copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License | 
|---|
| 4435 | applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you | 
|---|
| 4436 | add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You | 
|---|
| 4437 | may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading | 
|---|
| 4438 | or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However, | 
|---|
| 4439 | you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you | 
|---|
| 4440 | distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow | 
|---|
| 4441 | the conditions in section 3. | 
|---|
| 4442 |  | 
|---|
| 4443 | You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, | 
|---|
| 4444 | and you may publicly display copies. | 
|---|
| 4445 |  | 
|---|
| 4446 | 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY | 
|---|
| 4447 |  | 
|---|
| 4448 | If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than | 
|---|
| 4449 | 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you | 
|---|
| 4450 | must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, | 
|---|
| 4451 | all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and | 
|---|
| 4452 | Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly | 
|---|
| 4453 | and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The | 
|---|
| 4454 | front cover must present the full title with all words of the | 
|---|
| 4455 | title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material | 
|---|
| 4456 | on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the | 
|---|
| 4457 | covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and | 
|---|
| 4458 | satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in | 
|---|
| 4459 | other respects. | 
|---|
| 4460 |  | 
|---|
| 4461 | If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit | 
|---|
| 4462 | legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit | 
|---|
| 4463 | reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto | 
|---|
| 4464 | adjacent pages. | 
|---|
| 4465 |  | 
|---|
| 4466 | If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document | 
|---|
| 4467 | numbering more than 100, you must either include a | 
|---|
| 4468 | machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or | 
|---|
| 4469 | state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible | 
|---|
| 4470 | computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy | 
|---|
| 4471 | of the Document, free of added material, which the general | 
|---|
| 4472 | network-using public has access to download anonymously at no | 
|---|
| 4473 | charge using public-standard network protocols.  If you use the | 
|---|
| 4474 | latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you | 
|---|
| 4475 | begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that | 
|---|
| 4476 | this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated | 
|---|
| 4477 | location until at least one year after the last time you | 
|---|
| 4478 | distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or | 
|---|
| 4479 | retailers) of that edition to the public. | 
|---|
| 4480 |  | 
|---|
| 4481 | It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of | 
|---|
| 4482 | the Document well before redistributing any large number of | 
|---|
| 4483 | copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated | 
|---|
| 4484 | version of the Document. | 
|---|
| 4485 |  | 
|---|
| 4486 | 4. MODIFICATIONS | 
|---|
| 4487 |  | 
|---|
| 4488 | You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document | 
|---|
| 4489 | under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you | 
|---|
| 4490 | release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with | 
|---|
| 4491 | the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus | 
|---|
| 4492 | licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to | 
|---|
| 4493 | whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these | 
|---|
| 4494 | things in the Modified Version: | 
|---|
| 4495 |  | 
|---|
| 4496 | A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title | 
|---|
| 4497 | distinct    from that of the Document, and from those of previous | 
|---|
| 4498 | versions    (which should, if there were any, be listed in the | 
|---|
| 4499 | History section    of the Document).  You may use the same title | 
|---|
| 4500 | as a previous version    if the original publisher of that version | 
|---|
| 4501 | gives permission. | 
|---|
| 4502 | B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or | 
|---|
| 4503 | entities    responsible for authorship of the modifications in the | 
|---|
| 4504 | Modified    Version, together with at least five of the principal | 
|---|
| 4505 | authors of the    Document (all of its principal authors, if it | 
|---|
| 4506 | has less than five). | 
|---|
| 4507 | C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the | 
|---|
| 4508 | Modified Version, as the publisher. | 
|---|
| 4509 | D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. | 
|---|
| 4510 | E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications | 
|---|
| 4511 | adjacent to the other copyright notices. | 
|---|
| 4512 | F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license | 
|---|
| 4513 | notice    giving the public permission to use the Modified Version | 
|---|
| 4514 | under the    terms of this License, in the form shown in the | 
|---|
| 4515 | Addendum below. | 
|---|
| 4516 | G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant | 
|---|
| 4517 | Sections    and required Cover Texts given in the Document's | 
|---|
| 4518 | license notice. | 
|---|
| 4519 | H. Include an unaltered copy of this License. | 
|---|
| 4520 | I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add | 
|---|
| 4521 | to    it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and | 
|---|
| 4522 | publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. | 
|---|
| 4523 | If    there is no section entitled "History" in the Document, | 
|---|
| 4524 | create one    stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of | 
|---|
| 4525 | the Document as    given on its Title Page, then add an item | 
|---|
| 4526 | describing the Modified    Version as stated in the previous | 
|---|
| 4527 | sentence. | 
|---|
| 4528 | J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for | 
|---|
| 4529 | public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and | 
|---|
| 4530 | likewise    the network locations given in the Document for | 
|---|
| 4531 | previous versions    it was based on.  These may be placed in the | 
|---|
| 4532 | "History" section.     You may omit a network location for a work | 
|---|
| 4533 | that was published at    least four years before the Document | 
|---|
| 4534 | itself, or if the original    publisher of the version it refers | 
|---|
| 4535 | to gives permission. | 
|---|
| 4536 | K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", | 
|---|
| 4537 | preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the | 
|---|
| 4538 | substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements | 
|---|
| 4539 | and/or dedications given therein. | 
|---|
| 4540 | L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, | 
|---|
| 4541 | unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers | 
|---|
| 4542 | or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. | 
|---|
| 4543 | M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements."  Such a section | 
|---|
| 4544 | may not be included in the Modified Version. | 
|---|
| 4545 | N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements"    or to | 
|---|
| 4546 | conflict in title with any Invariant Section. | 
|---|
| 4547 |  | 
|---|
| 4548 | If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or | 
|---|
| 4549 | appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no | 
|---|
| 4550 | material copied from the Document, you may at your option | 
|---|
| 4551 | designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this, | 
|---|
| 4552 | add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified | 
|---|
| 4553 | Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any | 
|---|
| 4554 | other section titles. | 
|---|
| 4555 |  | 
|---|
| 4556 | You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains | 
|---|
| 4557 | nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various | 
|---|
| 4558 | parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has | 
|---|
| 4559 | been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition | 
|---|
| 4560 | of a standard. | 
|---|
| 4561 |  | 
|---|
| 4562 | You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, | 
|---|
| 4563 | and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end | 
|---|
| 4564 | of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one | 
|---|
| 4565 | passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be | 
|---|
| 4566 | added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the | 
|---|
| 4567 | Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, | 
|---|
| 4568 | previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity | 
|---|
| 4569 | you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may | 
|---|
| 4570 | replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous | 
|---|
| 4571 | publisher that added the old one. | 
|---|
| 4572 |  | 
|---|
| 4573 | The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this | 
|---|
| 4574 | License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to | 
|---|
| 4575 | assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version. | 
|---|
| 4576 |  | 
|---|
| 4577 | 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS | 
|---|
| 4578 |  | 
|---|
| 4579 | You may combine the Document with other documents released under | 
|---|
| 4580 | this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for | 
|---|
| 4581 | modified versions, provided that you include in the combination | 
|---|
| 4582 | all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, | 
|---|
| 4583 | unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your | 
|---|
| 4584 | combined work in its license notice. | 
|---|
| 4585 |  | 
|---|
| 4586 | The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and | 
|---|
| 4587 | multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single | 
|---|
| 4588 | copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name | 
|---|
| 4589 | but different contents, make the title of each such section unique | 
|---|
| 4590 | by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the | 
|---|
| 4591 | original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a | 
|---|
| 4592 | unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in | 
|---|
| 4593 | the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the | 
|---|
| 4594 | combined work. | 
|---|
| 4595 |  | 
|---|
| 4596 | In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled | 
|---|
| 4597 | "History" in the various original documents, forming one section | 
|---|
| 4598 | entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled | 
|---|
| 4599 | "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications."  You | 
|---|
| 4600 | must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements." | 
|---|
| 4601 |  | 
|---|
| 4602 | 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS | 
|---|
| 4603 |  | 
|---|
| 4604 | You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other | 
|---|
| 4605 | documents released under this License, and replace the individual | 
|---|
| 4606 | copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy | 
|---|
| 4607 | that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the | 
|---|
| 4608 | rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the | 
|---|
| 4609 | documents in all other respects. | 
|---|
| 4610 |  | 
|---|
| 4611 | You may extract a single document from such a collection, and | 
|---|
| 4612 | distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert | 
|---|
| 4613 | a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow | 
|---|
| 4614 | this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of | 
|---|
| 4615 | that document. | 
|---|
| 4616 |  | 
|---|
| 4617 | 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS | 
|---|
| 4618 |  | 
|---|
| 4619 | A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other | 
|---|
| 4620 | separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of | 
|---|
| 4621 | a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a | 
|---|
| 4622 | Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation | 
|---|
| 4623 | copyright is claimed for the compilation.  Such a compilation is | 
|---|
| 4624 | called an "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the | 
|---|
| 4625 | other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on | 
|---|
| 4626 | account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves | 
|---|
| 4627 | derivative works of the Document. | 
|---|
| 4628 |  | 
|---|
| 4629 | If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these | 
|---|
| 4630 | copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one | 
|---|
| 4631 | quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be | 
|---|
| 4632 | placed on covers that surround only the Document within the | 
|---|
| 4633 | aggregate.  Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole | 
|---|
| 4634 | aggregate. | 
|---|
| 4635 |  | 
|---|
| 4636 | 8. TRANSLATION | 
|---|
| 4637 |  | 
|---|
| 4638 | Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may | 
|---|
| 4639 | distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section | 
|---|
| 4640 | 4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special | 
|---|
| 4641 | permission from their copyright holders, but you may include | 
|---|
| 4642 | translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the | 
|---|
| 4643 | original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a | 
|---|
| 4644 | translation of this License provided that you also include the | 
|---|
| 4645 | original English version of this License.  In case of a | 
|---|
| 4646 | disagreement between the translation and the original English | 
|---|
| 4647 | version of this License, the original English version will prevail. | 
|---|
| 4648 |  | 
|---|
| 4649 | 9. TERMINATION | 
|---|
| 4650 |  | 
|---|
| 4651 | You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document | 
|---|
| 4652 | except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other | 
|---|
| 4653 | attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is | 
|---|
| 4654 | void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this | 
|---|
| 4655 | License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights, | 
|---|
| 4656 | from you under this License will not have their licenses | 
|---|
| 4657 | terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. | 
|---|
| 4658 |  | 
|---|
| 4659 | 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE | 
|---|
| 4660 |  | 
|---|
| 4661 | The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of | 
|---|
| 4662 | the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new | 
|---|
| 4663 | versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may | 
|---|
| 4664 | differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See | 
|---|
| 4665 | http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. | 
|---|
| 4666 |  | 
|---|
| 4667 | Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version | 
|---|
| 4668 | number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered | 
|---|
| 4669 | version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you | 
|---|
| 4670 | have the option of following the terms and conditions either of | 
|---|
| 4671 | that specified version or of any later version that has been | 
|---|
| 4672 | published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If | 
|---|
| 4673 | the Document does not specify a version number of this License, | 
|---|
| 4674 | you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the | 
|---|
| 4675 | Free Software Foundation. | 
|---|
| 4676 |  | 
|---|
| 4677 |  | 
|---|
| 4678 | ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents | 
|---|
| 4679 | ==================================================== | 
|---|
| 4680 |  | 
|---|
| 4681 | To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of | 
|---|
| 4682 | the License in the document and put the following copyright and license | 
|---|
| 4683 | notices just after the title page: | 
|---|
| 4684 |  | 
|---|
| 4685 | Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME. | 
|---|
| 4686 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document | 
|---|
| 4687 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 | 
|---|
| 4688 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; | 
|---|
| 4689 | with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the | 
|---|
| 4690 | Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. | 
|---|
| 4691 | A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU | 
|---|
| 4692 | Free Documentation License." | 
|---|
| 4693 |  | 
|---|
| 4694 | If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections" | 
|---|
| 4695 | instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no Front-Cover | 
|---|
| 4696 | Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being | 
|---|
| 4697 | LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts. | 
|---|
| 4698 |  | 
|---|
| 4699 | If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we | 
|---|
| 4700 | recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of | 
|---|
| 4701 | free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to | 
|---|
| 4702 | permit their use in free software. | 
|---|
| 4703 |  | 
|---|
| 4704 |  | 
|---|
| 4705 | File: standards.info,  Node: Index,  Prev: Copying This Manual,  Up: Top | 
|---|
| 4706 |  | 
|---|
| 4707 | Index | 
|---|
| 4708 | ***** | 
|---|
| 4709 |  | 
|---|
| 4710 | * Menu: | 
|---|
| 4711 |  | 
|---|
| 4712 | * #endif, commenting:                    Comments. | 
|---|
| 4713 | * --help option:                         Command-Line Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4714 | * --version option:                      Command-Line Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4715 | * -Wall compiler option:                 Syntactic Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4716 | * accepting contributions:               Contributions. | 
|---|
| 4717 | * address for bug reports:               Command-Line Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4718 | * ANSI C standard:                       Standard C. | 
|---|
| 4719 | * arbitrary limits on data:              Semantics. | 
|---|
| 4720 | * autoconf:                              System Portability. | 
|---|
| 4721 | * avoiding proprietary code:             Reading Non-Free Code. | 
|---|
| 4722 | * behavior, dependent on program's name: User Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4723 | * binary packages:                       Install Command Categories. | 
|---|
| 4724 | * bindir:                                Directory Variables. | 
|---|
| 4725 | * braces, in C source:                   Formatting. | 
|---|
| 4726 | * bug reports:                           Command-Line Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4727 | * canonical name of a program:           Command-Line Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4728 | * casting pointers to integers:          CPU Portability. | 
|---|
| 4729 | * change logs:                           Change Logs. | 
|---|
| 4730 | * change logs, conditional changes:      Conditional Changes. | 
|---|
| 4731 | * change logs, style:                    Style of Change Logs. | 
|---|
| 4732 | * command-line arguments, decoding:      Semantics. | 
|---|
| 4733 | * command-line interface:                Command-Line Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4734 | * commenting:                            Comments. | 
|---|
| 4735 | * compatibility with C and POSIX standards: Compatibility. | 
|---|
| 4736 | * compiler warnings:                     Syntactic Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4737 | * conditional changes, and change logs:  Conditional Changes. | 
|---|
| 4738 | * conditionals, comments for:            Comments. | 
|---|
| 4739 | * configure:                             Configuration. | 
|---|
| 4740 | * control-L:                             Formatting. | 
|---|
| 4741 | * conventions for makefiles:             Makefile Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4742 | * corba:                                 Graphical Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4743 | * credits for manuals:                   Manual Credits. | 
|---|
| 4744 | * data types, and portability:           CPU Portability. | 
|---|
| 4745 | * declaration for system functions:      System Functions. | 
|---|
| 4746 | * documentation:                         Documentation. | 
|---|
| 4747 | * doschk:                                Names. | 
|---|
| 4748 | * downloading this manual:               Preface. | 
|---|
| 4749 | * error messages:                        Semantics. | 
|---|
| 4750 | * error messages, formatting:            Errors. | 
|---|
| 4751 | * exec_prefix:                           Directory Variables. | 
|---|
| 4752 | * expressions, splitting:                Formatting. | 
|---|
| 4753 | * file usage:                            File Usage. | 
|---|
| 4754 | * file-name limitations:                 Names. | 
|---|
| 4755 | * formatting error messages:             Errors. | 
|---|
| 4756 | * formatting source code:                Formatting. | 
|---|
| 4757 | * formfeed:                              Formatting. | 
|---|
| 4758 | * function argument, declaring:          Syntactic Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4759 | * function prototypes:                   Standard C. | 
|---|
| 4760 | * getopt:                                Command-Line Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4761 | * gettext:                               Internationalization. | 
|---|
| 4762 | * gnome:                                 Graphical Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4763 | * graphical user interface:              Graphical Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4764 | * gtk:                                   Graphical Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4765 | * GUILE:                                 Source Language. | 
|---|
| 4766 | * implicit int:                          Syntactic Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4767 | * impossible conditions:                 Semantics. | 
|---|
| 4768 | * internationalization:                  Internationalization. | 
|---|
| 4769 | * legal aspects:                         Legal Issues. | 
|---|
| 4770 | * legal papers:                          Contributions. | 
|---|
| 4771 | * libexecdir:                            Directory Variables. | 
|---|
| 4772 | * libraries:                             Libraries. | 
|---|
| 4773 | * library functions, and portability:    System Functions. | 
|---|
| 4774 | * license for manuals:                   License for Manuals. | 
|---|
| 4775 | * lint:                                  Syntactic Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4776 | * long option names:                     Option Table. | 
|---|
| 4777 | * long-named options:                    Command-Line Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4778 | * makefile, conventions for:             Makefile Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4779 | * malloc return value:                   Semantics. | 
|---|
| 4780 | * man pages:                             Man Pages. | 
|---|
| 4781 | * manual structure:                      Manual Structure Details. | 
|---|
| 4782 | * memory allocation failure:             Semantics. | 
|---|
| 4783 | * memory usage:                          Memory Usage. | 
|---|
| 4784 | * message text, and internationalization: Internationalization. | 
|---|
| 4785 | * mmap:                                  Mmap. | 
|---|
| 4786 | * multiple variables in a line:          Syntactic Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4787 | * names of variables, functions, and files: Names. | 
|---|
| 4788 | * NEWS file:                             NEWS File. | 
|---|
| 4789 | * non-POSIX systems, and portability:    System Portability. | 
|---|
| 4790 | * non-standard extensions:               Using Extensions. | 
|---|
| 4791 | * NUL characters:                        Semantics. | 
|---|
| 4792 | * open brace:                            Formatting. | 
|---|
| 4793 | * optional features, configure-time:     Configuration. | 
|---|
| 4794 | * options for compatibility:             Compatibility. | 
|---|
| 4795 | * output device and program's behavior:  User Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4796 | * packaging:                             Releases. | 
|---|
| 4797 | * portability, and data types:           CPU Portability. | 
|---|
| 4798 | * portability, and library functions:    System Functions. | 
|---|
| 4799 | * portability, between system types:     System Portability. | 
|---|
| 4800 | * POSIX compatibility:                   Compatibility. | 
|---|
| 4801 | * POSIXLY_CORRECT, environment variable: Compatibility. | 
|---|
| 4802 | * post-installation commands:            Install Command Categories. | 
|---|
| 4803 | * pre-installation commands:             Install Command Categories. | 
|---|
| 4804 | * prefix:                                Directory Variables. | 
|---|
| 4805 | * program configuration:                 Configuration. | 
|---|
| 4806 | * program design:                        Design Advice. | 
|---|
| 4807 | * program name and its behavior:         User Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4808 | * program's canonical name:              Command-Line Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4809 | * programming languges:                  Source Language. | 
|---|
| 4810 | * proprietary programs:                  Reading Non-Free Code. | 
|---|
| 4811 | * README file:                           Releases. | 
|---|
| 4812 | * references to non-free material:       References. | 
|---|
| 4813 | * releasing:                             Managing Releases. | 
|---|
| 4814 | * sbindir:                               Directory Variables. | 
|---|
| 4815 | * signal handling:                       Semantics. | 
|---|
| 4816 | * spaces before open-paren:              Formatting. | 
|---|
| 4817 | * standard command-line options:         Command-Line Interfaces. | 
|---|
| 4818 | * standards for makefiles:               Makefile Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4819 | * string library functions:              System Functions. | 
|---|
| 4820 | * syntactic conventions:                 Syntactic Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4821 | * table of long options:                 Option Table. | 
|---|
| 4822 | * temporary files:                       Semantics. | 
|---|
| 4823 | * temporary variables:                   Syntactic Conventions. | 
|---|
| 4824 | * texinfo.tex, in a distribution:        Releases. | 
|---|
| 4825 | * TMPDIR environment variable:           Semantics. | 
|---|
| 4826 | * trademarks:                            Trademarks. | 
|---|
| 4827 | * where to obtain standards.texi:        Preface. | 
|---|
| 4828 |  | 
|---|
| 4829 |  | 
|---|
| 4830 |  | 
|---|
| 4831 | Tag Table: | 
|---|
| 4832 | Node: Top689 | 
|---|
| 4833 | Node: Preface1392 | 
|---|
| 4834 | Node: Legal Issues3611 | 
|---|
| 4835 | Node: Reading Non-Free Code4074 | 
|---|
| 4836 | Node: Contributions5797 | 
|---|
| 4837 | Node: Trademarks7946 | 
|---|
| 4838 | Node: Design Advice9004 | 
|---|
| 4839 | Node: Source Language9587 | 
|---|
| 4840 | Node: Compatibility11594 | 
|---|
| 4841 | Node: Using Extensions13217 | 
|---|
| 4842 | Node: Standard C14788 | 
|---|
| 4843 | Node: Conditional Compilation17186 | 
|---|
| 4844 | Node: Program Behavior18480 | 
|---|
| 4845 | Node: Semantics19398 | 
|---|
| 4846 | Node: Libraries24086 | 
|---|
| 4847 | Node: Errors25326 | 
|---|
| 4848 | Node: User Interfaces27102 | 
|---|
| 4849 | Node: Graphical Interfaces28702 | 
|---|
| 4850 | Node: Command-Line Interfaces29732 | 
|---|
| 4851 | Node: Option Table35798 | 
|---|
| 4852 | Node: Memory Usage50802 | 
|---|
| 4853 | Node: File Usage51822 | 
|---|
| 4854 | Node: Writing C52565 | 
|---|
| 4855 | Node: Formatting53414 | 
|---|
| 4856 | Node: Comments57472 | 
|---|
| 4857 | Node: Syntactic Conventions60770 | 
|---|
| 4858 | Node: Names64177 | 
|---|
| 4859 | Node: System Portability66381 | 
|---|
| 4860 | Node: CPU Portability68761 | 
|---|
| 4861 | Node: System Functions72012 | 
|---|
| 4862 | Node: Internationalization77214 | 
|---|
| 4863 | Node: Mmap80362 | 
|---|
| 4864 | Node: Documentation81067 | 
|---|
| 4865 | Node: GNU Manuals82171 | 
|---|
| 4866 | Node: Doc Strings and Manuals87223 | 
|---|
| 4867 | Node: Manual Structure Details88771 | 
|---|
| 4868 | Node: License for Manuals90184 | 
|---|
| 4869 | Node: Manual Credits91153 | 
|---|
| 4870 | Node: Printed Manuals91541 | 
|---|
| 4871 | Node: NEWS File92222 | 
|---|
| 4872 | Node: Change Logs92894 | 
|---|
| 4873 | Node: Change Log Concepts93643 | 
|---|
| 4874 | Node: Style of Change Logs95498 | 
|---|
| 4875 | Node: Simple Changes97544 | 
|---|
| 4876 | Node: Conditional Changes98779 | 
|---|
| 4877 | Node: Indicating the Part Changed100192 | 
|---|
| 4878 | Node: Man Pages100710 | 
|---|
| 4879 | Node: Reading other Manuals102329 | 
|---|
| 4880 | Node: Managing Releases103113 | 
|---|
| 4881 | Node: Configuration103875 | 
|---|
| 4882 | Node: Makefile Conventions110775 | 
|---|
| 4883 | Node: Makefile Basics111576 | 
|---|
| 4884 | Node: Utilities in Makefiles114741 | 
|---|
| 4885 | Node: Command Variables116877 | 
|---|
| 4886 | Node: Directory Variables120445 | 
|---|
| 4887 | Node: Standard Targets131330 | 
|---|
| 4888 | Ref: Standard Targets-Footnote-1142581 | 
|---|
| 4889 | Node: Install Command Categories142681 | 
|---|
| 4890 | Node: Releases147254 | 
|---|
| 4891 | Node: References151337 | 
|---|
| 4892 | Node: Copying This Manual153621 | 
|---|
| 4893 | Node: GNU Free Documentation License153835 | 
|---|
| 4894 | Node: Index173521 | 
|---|
| 4895 |  | 
|---|
| 4896 | End Tag Table | 
|---|